Operating instructions | Extron electronic 450 Plus Series Switch User Manual

CrossPoint 450 Plus Series
MAV Plus Series
Matrix Switchers
68-521-02 Rev. D
11 07
Precautions
Safety Instructions • English
Warning
This symbol is intended to alert the user of important operating and maintenance
(servicing) instructions in the literature provided with the equipment.
Power sources • This equipment should be operated only from the power source indicated on the product. This
equipment is intended to be used with a main power system with a grounded (neutral) conductor. The
third (grounding) pin is a safety feature, do not aempt to bypass or disable it.
This symbol is intended to alert the user of the presence of uninsulated dangerous
voltage within the product’s enclosure that may present a risk of electric shock.
Power disconnection • To remove power from the equipment safely, remove all power cords from the rear of
the equipment, or the desktop power module (if detachable), or from the power source receptacle (wall
plug).
Caution
Read Instructions • Read and understand all safety and operating instructions before using the equipment.
Retain Instructions • The safety instructions should be kept for future reference.
Follow Warnings • Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the equipment or in the user
information.
Avoid Aachments • Do not use tools or aachments that are not recommended by the equipment
manufacturer because they may be hazardous.
Consignes de Sécurité • Français
Power cord protection • Power cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be stepped on or pinched by
items placed upon or against them.
Servicing • Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. There are no user-serviceable parts inside. To
prevent the risk of shock, do not aempt to service this equipment yourself because opening or removing
covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards.
Slots and openings • If the equipment has slots or holes in the enclosure, these are provided to prevent
overheating of sensitive components inside. These openings must never be blocked by other objects.
Lithium baery • There is a danger of explosion if baery is incorrectly replaced. Replace it only with the
same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used baeries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Avertissement
Ce symbole sert à avertir l’utilisateur que la documentation fournie avec le matériel
contient des instructions importantes concernant l’exploitation et la maintenance
(réparation).
Alimentations• Ne faire fonctionner ce matériel qu’avec la source d’alimentation indiquée sur l’appareil. Ce
matériel doit être utilisé avec une alimentation principale comportant un fil de terre (neutre). Le troisième
contact (de mise à la terre) constitue un dispositif de sécurité : n’essayez pas de la contourner ni de la
désactiver.
Ce symbole sert à avertir l’utilisateur de la présence dans le boîtier de l’appareil
de tensions dangereuses non isolées posant des risques d’électrocution.
Déconnexion de l’alimentation• Pour mere le matériel hors tension sans danger, déconnectez tous les cordons
d’alimentation de l’arrière de l’appareil ou du module d’alimentation de bureau (s’il est amovible) ou encore
de la prise secteur.
Attention
Lire les instructions• Prendre connaissance de toutes les consignes de sécurité et d’exploitation avant
d’utiliser le matériel.
Conserver les instructions• Ranger les consignes de sécurité afin de pouvoir les consulter à l’avenir.
Respecter les avertissements • Observer tous les avertissements et consignes marqués sur le matériel ou
présentés dans la documentation utilisateur.
Eviter les pièces de fixation • Ne pas utiliser de pièces de fixation ni d’outils non recommandés par le
fabricant du matériel car cela risquerait de poser certains dangers.
Protection du cordon d’alimentation • Acheminer les cordons d’alimentation de manière à ce que personne ne
risque de marcher dessus et à ce qu’ils ne soient pas écrasés ou pincés par des objets.
Réparation-maintenance • Faire exécuter toutes les interventions de réparation-maintenance par un technicien
qualifié. Aucun des éléments internes ne peut être réparé par l’utilisateur. Afin d’éviter tout danger
d’électrocution, l’utilisateur ne doit pas essayer de procéder lui-même à ces opérations car l’ouverture ou le
retrait des couvercles risquent de l’exposer à de hautes tensions et autres dangers.
Fentes et orifices • Si le boîtier de l’appareil comporte des fentes ou des orifices, ceux-ci servent à empêcher
les composants internes sensibles de surchauffer. Ces ouvertures ne doivent jamais être bloquées par des
objets.
Lithium Baerie • Il a danger d’explosion s’ll y a remplacment incorrect de la baerie. Remplacer uniquement
avec une baerie du meme type ou d’un ype equivalent recommande par le constructeur. Mere au reut les
baeries usagees conformement aux instructions du fabricant.
Sicherheitsanleitungen • Deutsch
Stromquellen • Dieses Gerät sollte nur über die auf dem Produkt angegebene Stromquelle betrieben werden.
Dieses Gerät wurde für eine Verwendung mit einer Hauptstromleitung mit einem geerdeten (neutralen)
Leiter konzipiert. Der drie Kontakt ist für einen Erdanschluß, und stellt eine Sicherheitsfunktion dar. Diese
sollte nicht umgangen oder außer Betrieb gesetzt werden.
Dieses Symbol soll den Benutzer darauf aufmerksam machen, daß im Inneren des
Gehäuses dieses Produktes gefährliche Spannungen, die nicht isoliert sind und
die einen elektrischen Schock verursachen können, herrschen.
Stromunterbrechung • Um das Gerät auf sichere Weise vom Netz zu trennen, sollten Sie alle Netzkabel
aus der Rückseite des Gerätes, aus der externen Stomversorgung (falls dies möglich ist) oder aus der
Wandsteckdose ziehen.
Achtung
Lesen der Anleitungen • Bevor Sie das Gerät zum ersten Mal verwenden, sollten Sie alle Sicherheits-und
Bedienungsanleitungen genau durchlesen und verstehen.
Auewahren der Anleitungen • Die Hinweise zur elektrischen Sicherheit des Produktes sollten Sie
auewahren, damit Sie im Bedarfsfall darauf zurückgreifen können.
Befolgen der Warnhinweise • Befolgen Sie alle Warnhinweise und Anleitungen auf dem Gerät oder in der
Benutzerdokumentation.
Keine Zusatzgeräte • Verwenden Sie keine Werkzeuge oder Zusatzgeräte, die nicht ausdrücklich vom
Hersteller empfohlen wurden, da diese eine Gefahrenquelle darstellen können.
Instrucciones de seguridad • Español
Schutz des Netzkabels • Netzkabel sollten stets so verlegt werden, daß sie nicht im Weg liegen und niemand
darauf treten kann oder Objekte darauf- oder unmielbar dagegengestellt werden können.
Wartung • Alle Wartungsmaßnahmen sollten nur von qualifiziertem Servicepersonal durchgeführt werden.
Die internen Komponenten des Gerätes sind wartungsfrei. Zur Vermeidung eines elektrischen Schocks
versuchen Sie in keinem Fall, dieses Gerät selbst öffnen, da beim Entfernen der Abdeckungen die Gefahr
eines elektrischen Schlags und/oder andere Gefahren bestehen.
Schlitze und Öffnungen • Wenn das Gerät Schlitze oder Löcher im Gehäuse aufweist, dienen diese zur
Vermeidung einer Überhitzung der empfindlichen Teile im Inneren. Diese Öffnungen dürfen niemals von
anderen Objekten blockiert werden.
Litium-Baerie • Explosionsgefahr, falls die Baerie nicht richtig ersetzt wird. Ersetzen Sie verbrauchte
Baerien nur durch den gleichen oder einen vergleichbaren Baerietyp, der auch vom Hersteller empfohlen
wird. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Baerien bie gemäß den Herstelleranweisungen.
Advertencia
Este símbolo se utiliza para advertir al usuario sobre instrucciones importantes
de operación y mantenimiento (o cambio de partes) que se desean destacar en el
contenido de la documentación suministrada con los equipos.
Alimentación eléctrica • Este equipo debe conectarse únicamente a la fuente/tipo de alimentación eléctrica
indicada en el mismo. La alimentación eléctrica de este equipo debe provenir de un sistema de distribución
general con conductor neutro a tierra. La tercera pata (puesta a tierra) es una medida de seguridad, no
puentearia ni eliminaria.
Este símbolo se utiliza para advertir al usuario sobre la presencia de elementos con
voltaje peligroso sin protección aislante, que puedan encontrarse dentro de la caja
o alojamiento del producto, y que puedan representar riesgo de electrocución.
Desconexión de alimentación eléctrica • Para desconectar con seguridad la acometida de alimentación eléctrica
al equipo, desenchufar todos los cables de alimentación en el panel trasero del equipo, o desenchufar el
módulo de alimentación (si fuera independiente), o desenchufar el cable del receptáculo de la pared.
Precaucion
Leer las instrucciones • Leer y analizar todas las instrucciones de operación y seguridad, antes de usar el
equipo.
Conservar las instrucciones • Conservar las instrucciones de seguridad para futura consulta.
Obedecer las advertencias • Todas las advertencias e instrucciones marcadas en el equipo o en la
documentación del usuario, deben ser obedecidas.
Evitar el uso de accesorios • No usar herramientas o accesorios que no sean especificamente recomendados
por el fabricante, ya que podrian implicar riesgos.
ᅝܼ乏ⶹ•Ё᭛
䖭Ͼヺোᦤ⼎⫼᠋䆹䆒໛⫼᠋᠟‫ݠ‬Ё᳝䞡㽕ⱘ᪡԰੠㓈ᡸ䇈ᯢDŽ
䖭Ͼヺো䄺ਞ⫼᠋䆹䆒໛ᴎ໇‫ݙ‬᳝ᲈ䴆ⱘॅ䰽⬉य़ˈ᳝㾺⬉ॅ䰽DŽ
⊼ᛣ
Vorsicht
Dieses Symbol soll dem Benutzer in der im Lieferumfang enthaltenen
Dokumentation besonders wichtige Hinweise zur Bedienung und Wartung
(Instandhaltung) geben.
䯙䇏䇈ᯢк• 䑩ㅸỀ䑩嬦嫿⡈↎⼆枼敆嬼⶷䍇夤ㆁ㙊⫊₩⏍Ề䑩嬵㕏ɿ
ֱᄬ䇈ᯢк• 䑩ㅸⷕ἞⪙⫊₩嬵㕏ᶧḦ⡈⭇㚦Ề䑩ɿ
䙉ᅜ䄺ਞ• 䑩ㅸⷕ徶⫉ᷨ␂⏍䑩ㅸ㉈⊘ᵋ䗅ㆁ㙊⫊₩⏍㐎ẝ嬵㕏ɿ
䙓‫ܡ‬䗑ࡴ• ᵎ壂Ề䑩嬦ᷨ␂⋃⒇㯢㙊㋩劑䗅⴦₸ㅗ弾⇡嫿⡈澤Ḧ忀₎⊲斪ɿ
Protección del cables de alimentación • Los cables de alimentación eléctrica se deben instalar en lugares donde
no sean pisados ni apretados por objetos que se puedan apoyar sobre ellos.
Reparaciones/mantenimiento • Solicitar siempre los servicios técnicos de personal calificado. En el interior no
hay partes a las que el usuario deba acceder. Para evitar riesgo de electrocución, no intentar personalmente
la reparación/mantenimiento de este equipo, ya que al abrir o extraer las tapas puede quedar expuesto a
voltajes peligrosos u otros riesgos.
Ranuras y aberturas • Si el equipo posee ranuras o orificios en su caja/alojamiento, es para evitar el
sobrecalientamiento de componentes internos sensibles. Estas aberturas nunca se deben obstruir con otros
objetos.
Batería de litio • Existe riesgo de explosión si esta batería se coloca en la posición incorrecta. Cambiar esta
batería únicamente con el mismo tipo (o su equivalente) recomendado por el fabricante. Desachar las
baterías usadas siguiendo las instrucciones del fabricante.
䄺ਞ
⬉⑤• 嬦嫿⡈⌫倾Ề䑩ᷨ␂ᵋ㝈㕏䗅䑶㷑ɿ嫿⡈⼆枼Ề䑩㙊♱一䗅Ờ䑶䰼丠Ờ䑶ɿ䩭ᵊ㚢一
澠♱一澡㕰⫊₩嫿㓾澤ᵎ倾ᵎ䑩ㅗ崴弈ɿ
ᢨᥝ⬉⑤• ᵻ⫊₩♱ḏ嫿⡈㈕㋊䑶㷑澤嬸㈕㋊ㆁ㙊嫿⡈⍏ㅗ㞍暣䑶㷑䗅䑶㷑一澤ㅗḼẖ㋦ⅱⵃ
䑶䰼丠䗅䑶㷑一ɿ
⬉⑤㒓ֱᡸ• ⣦Ⓟⵄ一澤忀₎埬嵪嵐澤ㅗ愎䆪㉥⋌ɿ
㓈ᡸ•ㆁ㙊丵Ἧ⼆枼䑲嫥嬂䗅丵Ἧ᷻⎙弜垍ɿ嫿⡈⃆怩㯢㙊䑩ㅸ⌰Ḧ㘵㊣䗅昷ḷɿᵻ忀₎℻䋱
大䑶⊲斪ᵎ壂儫ⴲ嬖☿㆔⹁嫿⡈䘗⪑丵Ἧ嬦嫿⡈ɿ
䗮亢ᄨ• 㙊ᷜ嫿⡈㙻⠴ᵋ㙊彛栏㤾ㅗ⪕澤⫄ḭ㕰䑩㚦敳㪣㙻⃆㒐だ₄ḷ弈䀮ɿᵎ壂䑩Ḽẖᵝ
壀㉢Ẑ彛栏⪕ɿ
䫖⬉∴• ᵎ㪤䞯䗅㘵㊣䑶㮡ṛ㙊䅇㿹䗅⊲斪ɿ⼆枼Ề䑩ᵏ⋃⫷㋩劑䗅䘹⍍ㅗ䘹弒⛌⌸䗅䑶㮡ɿ
㉊䂨䑠ᷨ⋃䗅⸻嫯⡅䍇ⷠ⹄䑶㮡ɿ
FCC Class A Notice
N
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
N
This unit was tested with shielded cables on the peripheral devices. Shielded cables must be
used with the unit to ensure compliance.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Quick Start — CrossPoint 450 Plus
and MAV Plus Switchers
Installation
RS-232
All Models
1
Pin#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Turn off power to the input and output devices,
and remove the power cords from them.
2 (video models)
CrossPoint 450 Plus — Cable the switcher for
RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, component/
HDTV video, S-video, or composite video input
and output.
R
(high impedance)
(high impedance)
NO GROUND HERE.
Unbalanced Output
R
Sleeve(s)
Tip
Tip
Ring
Sleeve(s)
Tip
Ring
L
Tip
NO GROUND HERE.
7 (MAV Plus)
Balanced Output
CAUTION Connect the sleeve to ground.
Connecting the sleeve to a negative (-)
terminal will damage the audio output
circuits.
8
BBG 6 A
BLACK BURST/COLOR BAR
/AUDIO GENERATOR
POWER
12V
0.5A MAX
1 KHZ AUDIO
+4dBu
1
R
L
1
1 2 3
-10dBV PAL
BLACKBURST/
COLORBAR
2
Extron
BBG 6 A
Black Burst Color Bar
Audio Generator
Plug the switcher into
a grounded AC source.
3
5
4
6
ON
BLACKBURST
OUT
Connect to
MAV Plus.
EXT
SYNC
Terminate cable
or connect to
another device.
Definitions
Tie — An input-to-output connection.
Set of ties — An input tied to 2 or more outputs.
Configuration — One or more ties or sets of ties.
MAV Plus 128 AV RCA — Cable the
switcher for stereo audio input and
output. Each input and output has two
RCA connectors (left and right) for
unbalanced audio input or output.
Current configuration — The currently active
configuration (also called configuration 0).
4
If desired, connect a control system
or computer to the rear panel
Remote RS-232/RS-422 port. See
the pinout table in the next column.
If desired, attach
an external sync
timing device to
the external sync
connectors.
NTSC
L
Balanced Input
Function
Transmit +
Transmit –
Receive +
Receive –
Ground
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
• Computer or control system connection —
Wire the interface cable as a crossover cable.
Most models with audio — Cable the switcher
for audio input and output. High impedance is
generally over 800 ohms.
Unbalanced Input
Pin
TX+
TX–
RX+
RX–
Gnd
—
—
—
—
• Network connection — Wire as a patch
(straight) cable.
3 (models with audio)
Tip
Sleeve
Function
Not used
Transmit –
Receive –
Not used
Ground
Not used
Receive +
Transmit +
Not used
If desired, connect a network WAN or LAN hub,
a control system, or computer to the Ethernet
RJ-45 port. See chapter 2, “Installation”, for
details.
See chapter 2, “Installation”, to connect
the various video formats to and from the
various models.
Tip
Ring
Sleeve (s)
Tip
Ring
Pin
—
TX–
RX–
—
Gnd
—
RX+
TX+
—
6
MAV Plus video models — Cable the switcher
for component/HDTV video, S-video, or
composite video input and output.
Tip
Sleeve
Pin Function
— Not used
TX Transmit
RX Receive
— Not used
Gnd Ground
— Not used
— Not used
— Not used
— Not used
RS-422
84 — 1616 2412 — 3232
5
1
9
6
Female
5 (Matrix sizes up to 1616)
If desired, connect a control system or computer
to the front panel Configuration (RS-232) port.
Use an optional 9-pin D to 2.5 mm mini jack
TRS RS-232 cable, part #70-335-01.
Global preset — A configuration that has been
stored. One global preset can be assigned to
each input button. When a global preset is
retrieved from memory, it becomes the current
configuration.
Front Panel Controls
Input and output buttons select inputs and
outputs. Output buttons light amber to
indicate video and audio ties. The buttons
light green to indicate video-only ties. The
buttons light red to indicate audio-only ties.
Input and output buttons also select presets.
Quick Start — CrossPoint 450 Plus
and MAV Plus Switchers, Cont’d
On audio models, the output buttons also
display the selected input’s audio level.
On audio models, the input buttons also
display the selected output’s volume level.
Enter button saves changes.
Preset button saves a configuration as a preset or
recalls a previously-defined preset.
View button selects a view-only mode that
prevents inadvertent configuration changes.
On audio models, View decrements the level
and volume. See “View, adjust the audio level”.
Save or recall a preset
1. Save a preset — Press and hold the Preset
button for 2 seconds.
Recall a preset — Press and release the Preset
button.
Save a
preset
Recall a
preset
PRESET
Green when selected.
Off when deselected.
RGBHV AUDIO
Red when selected.
Off when deselected.
2. Press and release the desired input button.
Press and release.
PRESET
Preset button lights.
•
All input and output buttons with
assigned presets light red.
The configuration data at assigned
preset locations will be overwritten.
1
2
3
4
5
6
17 18 19 20 21 22
2. Press and release the desired input or output
button.
The button blinks red to indicate that
this preset is selected to save or recall.
1
I/O
PRESET
2 seconds
•
Create a tie
1. Press and release the RGBHV/Video and/or
Audio I/O button(s) to select or deselect
video and/or audio as desired.
Press and hold.
Preset button blinks.
Esc button cancels selections in progress and
resets the front panel button indications. The
Esc button does not reset: the current
configuration, the RGBHV or video and audio
selection, any presets, or any audio level or
volume settings. On audio models, Esc
increments the level and volume. See “View,
adjust the audio level”.
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus)/Video (MAV Plus)
and Audio buttons select/deselect video
and/or audio. The Audio button blinks to
indicate audio breakaway. The Audio button
also selects the audio level/adjust mode. See
“View, adjust the audio level”.
PRESET
The Enter button blinks
red to indicate the need to
activate the save or recall.
ENTER
3. Press and release the Enter button.
View, adjust the audio level
1. Press and hold the
Audio button.
AUDIO
2 seconds
AUDIO
Press and Audio button blinks.
2. Press an input or
Hold
output button. See
chapter 3 to read the displayed value.
The button lights to indicate the selection.
5
5
1
3. Press and release the desired output button(s).
Amber indicates RGBHV/video and audio tie.
Green indicates RGBHV/video only tie.
Red indicates audio only tie.
3
4
8
ENTER
Green indicates the need
to confirm the change.
4. Press and release the Enter button.
Press an Input button to adjust gain/attenuation.
Press an Output button to adjust volume.
2
17 18
Output buttons display gain/attenuation.
Input buttons display volume.
1
Lit button
1 Unlit button
3. Increase and
View button
decreases the
decrease the gain/
level or volume.
attenuation or
volume level by pressing
the Esc ( ) and View ( )
VIEW
buttons.
4. Press and release the
Audio button to exit.
Esc button
increases the
level or volume.
ESC
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 • Introduction ....................................................................................................... 1-1
About this Manual ............................................................................................................. 1-2
About the Matrix Switchers .......................................................................................... 1-2
CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers ............................................................................................ 1-5
MAV Plus switchers ............................................................................................................ 1-6
Definitions ............................................................................................................................. 1-7
Features ................................................................................................................................... 1-8
Chapter 2 • Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-1
Mounting the Switcher .................................................................................................... 2-2
UL requirements ........................................................................................................... 2-2
Mounting instructions .................................................................................................. 2-2
Rear Panel Views ................................................................................................................. 2-3
CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers ............................................................................................ 2-3
MAV Plus switchers ............................................................................................................ 2-5
Rear Panel Connections ................................................................................................... 2-8
Video input and output (video switchers) ........................................................................ 2-8
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only) ................................................................. 2-8
Video (MAV Plus switchers only) ................................................................................. 2-10
Sync termination switches (CrossPoint 450 Plus only) ................................................... 2-12
Audio input and output (models with audio only) ....................................................... 2-13
Captive screw connector models (all except MAV Plus 128 AV RCA) .......................... 2-13
RCA connector model (MAV Plus 128 AV RCA) ........................................................... 2-14
RS-232/RS-422 ................................................................................................................... 2-14
Ethernet ............................................................................................................................ 2-15
Cabling and RJ-45 connector wiring ........................................................................... 2-15
Reset button ..................................................................................................................... 2-16
External sync (MAV Plus video models only) .................................................................. 2-17
Power ............................................................................................................................... 2-18
Front Panel Configuration Port (Matrix Sizes up to 1616 Only) ............... 2-18
Chapter 3 • Operation ............................................................................................................. 3-1
Front Panel Controls and Indicators ......................................................................... 3-2
Definitions .......................................................................................................................... 3-4
Input and output buttons ................................................................................................. 3-4
Control buttons .................................................................................................................. 3-5
I/O controls ......................................................................................................................... 3-8
Power indicators (2412 and larger models only) ............................................................. 3-9
Button icons ....................................................................................................................... 3-9
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents
i
Table of Contents, cont’d
Front Panel Operations .................................................................................................... 3-9
Front panel security lockouts ............................................................................................ 3-9
Power ............................................................................................................................... 3-10
Creating a configuration ................................................................................................. 3-10
Example 1: Creating a set of video and audio ties ...................................................... 3-11
Example 2: Adding a tie to a set of video and audio ties ........................................... 3-13
Example 3: Removing a tie from a set of video and audio ties ................................... 3-15
Viewing a configuration ................................................................................................. 3-17
Example 4: Viewing video and audio, audio only, and video only ties ....................... 3-18
I/O grouping ..................................................................................................................... 3-21
Example 5: Grouping inputs and outputs ................................................................... 3-23
Setting RGB delay (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only) ................................................ 3-26
Example 6: Setting the RGB delay for an output ........................................................ 3-26
Using presets .................................................................................................................... 3-28
Example 7: Saving a preset ......................................................................................... 3-29
Example 8: Recalling a preset ..................................................................................... 3-31
Muting and unmuting video and/or audio outputs ...................................................... 3-32
Example 9: Muting and unmuting an output ............................................................. 3-33
Viewing and adjusting the input audio level (audio models) ....................................... 3-35
Example 10: Viewing and adjusting an input audio level ........................................... 3-36
Viewing and adjusting the output volume (audio models) .......................................... 3-41
Reading the displayed volume ................................................................................... 3-42
Example 11: Viewing and adjusting an output volume level ...................................... 3-45
Setting the front panel locks (Executive modes) ........................................................... 3-48
Selecting Lock mode 2 or toggling between mode 2 and mode 0 ............................. 3-49
Selecting Lock mode 2 or toggling between mode 2 and mode 1 ............................. 3-49
Performing a system reset from the front panel ........................................................... 3-50
Background illumination ................................................................................................. 3-50
Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate .................................... 3-51
Rear Panel Controls ......................................................................................................... 3-53
Performing soft system resets ......................................................................................... 3-53
Performing a hard reset .................................................................................................. 3-55
Optimizing the Audio (Audio Switchers) ............................................................. 3-56
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................ 3-56
General checks ................................................................................................................. 3-56
Plasma display S-video problem (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only) .......................... 3-56
Configuration Worksheets ........................................................................................... 3-57
Worksheet example 1: System equipment ..................................................................... 3-57
Worksheet example 2: Daily configuration .................................................................... 3-58
Worksheet example 3: Test configuration ...................................................................... 3-59
32-button switchers configuration worksheet ............................................................... 3-61
16-button and smaller switchers configuration worksheet .......................................... 3-63
ii
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents
Chapter 4 • Programmer’s Guide ..................................................................................... 4-1
Serial Ports ............................................................................................................................. 4-2
Rear panel Remote port .................................................................................................... 4-2
Front panel Configuration port (matrix sizes up to 1616 only) ...................................... 4-3
Ethernet Link ......................................................................................................................... 4-4
Ethernet connection .......................................................................................................... 4-4
Default IP addresses ........................................................................................................... 4-4
Host-to-Switcher Instructions ....................................................................................... 4-5
Switcher-Initiated Messages ......................................................................................... 4-5
Switcher Error Responses ............................................................................................... 4-6
Using the Command/Response Tables ...................................................................... 4-6
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands ..................................................... 4-7
Symbol definitions ............................................................................................................. 4-7
Command/Response Table for IP SIS Commands .............................................. 4-17
Symbol definitions ........................................................................................................... 4-17
Special Characters ............................................................................................................ 4-19
Chapter 5 • Matrix Software .............................................................................................. 5-1
Matrix Switchers Control Program ............................................................................ 5-2
Installing the software ...................................................................................................... 5-2
Software operation via Ethernet ...................................................................................... 5-3
Ethernet protocol settings ............................................................................................ 5-3
Using the software ............................................................................................................ 5-4
IP Settings/Options window .............................................................................................. 5-7
Matrix IP Address field .................................................................................................. 5-8
Extron Name/Descriptor field ....................................................................................... 5-8
Gateway IP Address field .............................................................................................. 5-9
Subnet Mask field ......................................................................................................... 5-9
Hardware Address field ................................................................................................ 5-9
Use DHCP checkbox ...................................................................................................... 5-9
Date field .................................................................................................................... 5-10
Time (local) field ......................................................................................................... 5-10
Sync Time to PC button .............................................................................................. 5-10
GMT (offset) field ....................................................................................................... 5-10
Use Daylight Savings checkbox ................................................................................... 5-11
Administrator Password field ..................................................................................... 5-11
User Password field .................................................................................................... 5-11
Mail Server IP Address field ........................................................................................ 5-12
Mail Server Domain Name field .................................................................................. 5-12
E-mail Addressee fields ............................................................................................... 5-12
Update firmware ............................................................................................................. 5-13
Ethernet-connected firmware upload ........................................................................ 5-14
Serial-port-connected firmware upload ..................................................................... 5-15
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents
iii
Table of Contents, cont’d
Upload HTML files ........................................................................................................... 5-17
Windows buttons, drop boxes, and trash ...................................................................... 5-18
Windows menus ............................................................................................................... 5-19
File menu .................................................................................................................... 5-19
Tools menu ................................................................................................................. 5-19
Preferences menu ....................................................................................................... 5-21
Master Reset selection ................................................................................................ 5-22
Using emulation mode .................................................................................................... 5-22
Using the help system ...................................................................................................... 5-22
Special Characters ............................................................................................................ 5-22
Button Label Generator ................................................................................................. 5-23
Using the software .......................................................................................................... 5-23
Chapter 6 • HTML Operation ............................................................................................... 6-1
Download the Startup Page .......................................................................................... 6-2
System Status Page ........................................................................................................... 6-3
DSVP page (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only) .............................................................. 6-4
System Configuration Page ........................................................................................... 6-5
IP Settings fields ................................................................................................................. 6-6
Unit Name field ............................................................................................................ 6-6
DHCP radio buttons ...................................................................................................... 6-6
IP Address field ............................................................................................................. 6-6
Gateway IP Address field .............................................................................................. 6-6
Subnet Mask field ......................................................................................................... 6-6
MAC Address field ........................................................................................................ 6-6
Date/Time Settings fields ................................................................................................... 6-7
Passwords page .................................................................................................................. 6-8
Email Settings page ........................................................................................................... 6-9
Mail IP address field ..................................................................................................... 6-9
Domain Name field ...................................................................................................... 6-9
Email address fields .................................................................................................... 6-10
Firmware Upgrade page ................................................................................................. 6-10
File Management Page .................................................................................................. 6-11
Set and View Ties Page .................................................................................................. 6-12
Create or delete a tie ....................................................................................................... 6-13
RGB and Audio Settings page ......................................................................................... 6-13
Change the input gain and attenuation (audio models only) .................................... 6-14
Mute or unmute one or all outputs ............................................................................ 6-15
Change the RGB delay (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only) ....................................... 6-16
Change the output volume level (audio models only) ............................................... 6-17
Global Presets page ......................................................................................................... 6-19
Save a preset .............................................................................................................. 6-19
Recall a preset ............................................................................................................ 6-19
Special Characters ............................................................................................................ 6-20
iv
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents
Appendix A • Ethernet Connection
.............................................................................. A-1
Ethernet Link ........................................................................................................................ A-2
Ethernet connection ......................................................................................................... A-2
Default address ................................................................................................................. A-2
Ping to determine Extron IP address ................................................................................ A-3
Ping to determine Web IP address .................................................................................... A-3
Connect as a Telnet client ................................................................................................. A-3
Telnet tips ........................................................................................................................... A-4
Open .........................................................................................................................
Escape character and Esc key ..................................................................................
Local echo .................................................................................................................
Set carriage return-line feed ...................................................................................
Close .........................................................................................................................
Help ...........................................................................................................................
Quit ...........................................................................................................................
A-4
A-4
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-5
A-5
Subnetting — A Primer ................................................................................................... A-6
Gateways ........................................................................................................................... A-6
Local and remote devices ................................................................................................. A-6
IP addresses and octets ..................................................................................................... A-6
Subnet masks and octets .................................................................................................. A-6
Determining whether devices are on the same subnet .................................................. A-7
Appendix B • Reference Information
........................................................................... B-1
CrossPoint 450 Plus Specifications ............................................................................. B-2
MAV Plus Specifications .................................................................................................. B-6
Part Numbers ...................................................................................................................... B-11
CrossPoint 450 Plus part numbers ................................................................................... B-11
MAV Plus part numbers ................................................................................................... B-11
Included parts .................................................................................................................. B-13
Replacement parts ........................................................................................................... B-13
Optional accessories ........................................................................................................ B-13
Cables ............................................................................................................................... B-14
Bulk cable ................................................................................................................... B-14
Assorted connectors ................................................................................................... B-14
Pre-cut cables ............................................................................................................. B-14
Button Labels ...................................................................................................................... B-15
Installing labels in the matrix switcher’s buttons ........................................................... B-15
Button label blanks .......................................................................................................... B-17
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents
v
Table of Contents, cont’d
All trademarks mentioned in this manual are the properties of their respective owners.
68-521-02 Rev. D
11 07
vi
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Table of Contents
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers
1
Chapter One
Introduction
About this Manual
About the Matrix Switchers
Definitions
Features
Introduction, cont’d
Introduction
About this Manual
This manual contains installation, configuration, and operating information for the
complete Extron family of full-function, medium- and large-sized, analog matrix
switchers, specifically:
•
CrossPoint 450 Plus ultra-wideband RGBHV and audio matrix switchers
•
MAV Plus broadcast quality HDTV/component video, S-video, and
composite video and audio matrix switchers
About the Matrix Switchers
Matrix switchers distribute any input to any combination of outputs. The matrix
switchers can route multiple input/output configurations simultaneously.
The matrix switchers are single box solutions to complex wideband (figure 1-1) or
low resolution (figure 1-2) video and/or audio routing applications. Each input
and output is individually isolated and buffered, and any input(s) can be switched
to any one or all outputs with virtually no crosstalk or signal noise between
channels.
Class Room 101
Class Room 102
Class Room 106
Class Room 105
Class Room 104
Class Room 103
LAN
Extron
CrossPoint 450 Plus 128 HVA
Ethernet
Matrix Switcher
8
7
6
TP
S
UT 5
T
SE
RE
LAN
1
ACT LINK
OU
4
3
2
R
G
Extron
DVS 304
B
/B-Y
G
/Y
O
U
T
P
U
T
11
LAN
RESET
5
B-Y
VID
3
OU
TP
UT
700
VSC RTER
S
CONVE
SCAN
X
MIN/MA
2
E
SIZE
N/SIZ
ER/PA
CENT
V
4
1
LINK
ACT
3
NC
NEXT
Extron
VSC 700
MENU
NC
V SY 12
H SY
E
FREEZ
RESET
11
2
IR
10
1
RGB/R-
I
N
P
U
T
4
V
H
V
H/
HV
Y,Y,B-Y
YC
.3A
7
6
H
B
TS
PU 7
4
SDI
100-240V
B
G
10
9
8
IN
/VID
,Y,B-Y/YC
8
5
RGB/R-Y
R-Y
/C
Y
/VID
R
6
Scaler
RS-232
R
/R-Y
12
3
9
2
1
8
Hz
50/60
7
Scan Converter
6
5
IN
PU
TS
4
3
2
1
VCR
DVD
Extron
DVS 304
Scaler
RS-232
B
/B-Y
G
/Y
R
/R-Y
O
U
T
P
U
T
LAN
RESET
LINK
ACT
/VID
,Y,B-Y/YC
V
RGB/R-Y
H/
HV
R-Y
/C
Y
/VID
4
Y,Y,B-Y
SDI
RGB/RYC
.3A
100-240V
I
N
P
U
T
B-Y
3
2
VID
1
Hz
50/60
Extron
RGB 109xi
Interface
Extron
RGB 109xi
Extron
RGB 109xi
Interface
Interface
Extron
RGB 109xi
Extron
RGB 109xi
Interface
Interface
Cable Box
Extron
DVS 304
RS-232
B
/B-Y
G
/Y
R
/R-Y
O
U
T
P
U
T
LAN
RESET
LINK
ACT
Scaler
/VID
,Y,B-Y/YC
V
RGB/R-Y
H/
HV
R-Y
/C
Y
/VID
4
Y,Y,B-Y
SDI
RGB/RYC
.3A
100-240V
I
N
P
U
T
B-Y
VID
3
2
1
Hz
50/60
DVD
Student
Computer
Internet
Connection
Student
Computer
Student
Computer
Instructor
Computer
Figure 1-1 — Typical CrossPoint 450 Plus matrix switcher application
1-2
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
16 Outputs
LCD
Projector
Sound
System
CRT
Projector
LAN
15
Ethernet
13
16
11
Y OU
7
TP
UT
14
S 9
12
15
10
5
13
8
16
3
UT
S
14
9
12
15
10
15
5
13
8
11
4
12
9
4
12
7
5
2
15
3
10
5
13
8
1
16
14
12
9
10
8
6
16
3
11
6
14
1
4
11
6
1
14
2
15
13
3
16
11
S
12
10
13
8
UT
14
S
UT 9
5
8
6
C INP
7
TP
2
15
3
4
OU
BY 7
LAN
6
1
S 9
10
1
16
3
16
14
UT
RS232/RS422
13
11
Y INP
7
5
RESET
C OU
7
2
TP
REMOTE
Monitor
4
SYNC
11
6
1
INP
B Y7
UT
2
S
9
12
10
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
4
2
5
8
3
15
6
1
13
4
Extron
MAV Plus 1616 HDA
11
2
9
7
5
3
1
16
I
N
P
U
T
S
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
ED
LIST
1T23.
US I.T.E
C
System Control
Matrix Switcher
16 Inputs
VCR
ING
ORD
REC essive
/-R a Progr
-RW Cinem
sion
DVD
Preci
Video Camera
DVD Player
Figure 1-2 — Typical MAV Plus matrix switcher application
All of the matrix switchers are available in a variety of matrix sizes (the matrix size
is the number of inputs and outputs).
CrossPoint 450 Plus series switchers offer two models of each matrix size:
•
HVA for switching RGBHV video and two-channel stereo audio
• HV for switching RGBHV video signals only
MAV Plus series switchers offer multiple models of all matrix sizes, with one, two,
or three (MAV Plus 1616 and smaller) video planes, to support different low
resolution video formats (exceptions are noted in “MAV Plus switchers” on
page 1-6):
•
HDA for switching component/HDTV video and two-channel stereo audio
•
HD for switching component/HDTV video signals only
•
SVA for switching S-video and two-channel stereo audio
•
SV for switching S-video signals only
•
AV for switching composite video and two-channel stereo audio
•
V for switching composite video signals only
•
A for switching two-channel stereo audio only
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
1-3
Introduction, cont’d
In this manual, the term “video model” refers to any CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher that switches video.
In this manual, the term “audio model” refers to any CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher that switches audio.
All audio models, with the exception of the MAV Plus 128 AV RCA, input and
output audio on 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw terminals.
The MAV Plus 128 AV RCA inputs and outputs audio on RCA connectors.
For all switchers with video and audio, the audio switching can either be linked
with the video (audio follow) or independent of the video (audio breakaway).
Adjustable input audio gain and attenuation compensates for level differences
between audio inputs.
Each matrix switcher can be remotely controlled via its Ethernet port, its
rear panel RS-232/RS-422 port, or its front panel Configuration (RS-232) port
(matrix sizes up to 1616 only). The matrix switchers are programmed with Extron’s
Simple Instruction Set™ (SIS™), a set of basic ASCII code commands that provide
simple control through a control system or PC without programming long, obscure
strings of code. SIS commands can be entered via either the Ethernet link or either
serial link.
The Ethernet port can be connected through a local area network (LAN) or wide
area network (WAN).
The CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher features e-mail notification of
maintenance or other concerned personnel concerning the status of the power
supplies and fans and the loss or resumption of sync on individual inputs.
The Ethernet port or either serial port can be connected to a control system, a PC, or
Extron’s MKP 2000 or MKP 3000 remote control panel.
The matrix switchers are housed in rack-mountable, metal enclosures with 19" rack
ears. The amount of vertical rack space required for each switcher is as follows:
•
2U high enclosure


•
3U high enclosure


•
CrossPoint 450 Plus 816, 168, and 1212, 1616 HV and HVA switchers
8U high enclosure


•
MAV Plus 2412, 2424, 3216, and 3232 SV, AV, V, and A switchers
6U high enclosure

•
MAV Plus 168, 816, and 1616 HDA and HD switchers
5U high enclosure

•
CrossPoint 450 Plus 84, 88, 124, and 128 HV and HVA switchers
MAV Plus 168, 816, 1212, and 1616 SVA and SV switchers
4U high enclosure

•
MAV Plus 88 and 128 HDA, HD, SVA, and SV switchers
MAV Plus 88, 128, 816, 164 (audio only), 168, 1212, and 1616 AV, AV RCA,
V, and A switchers
CrossPoint 450 Plus 2412 and 2424 HV and HVA switchers
MAV Plus 2412, 2424, 3216, and 3232 SVA switchers
10U high enclosure

CrossPoint 450 Plus 3216 and 3232 HV and HVA switchers
The appropriate rack mounting kit is included with each switcher.
1-4
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
Each model has an internal 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, auto switchable power
supply that provides worldwide power compatibility. The CrossPoint 450 Plus
2412, 2424, 3216, and 3232 and MAV Plus 2412, 2424, 3216, and 3232 each have two,
primary and redundant, power supplies. The power ratings of the power supplies
for the various switchers are as follows:
•
20 watts


•
30 watts



•
MAV Plus 2424 and 3232
150 watts

•
MAV Plus 2412 and 3216
120 watts

•
CrossPoint 450 Plus 816, 168, 1212, and 1616
100 watts

•
CrossPoint 450 Plus 84, 88, 124, and 128
MAV Plus 816, 168, 1212, and 1616
MAV Plus 164 A
36 watts

•
MAV Plus 128 AV RCA
MAV Plus 88 and 128
CrossPoint 450 Plus 2412 and 3216
180 watts

CrossPoint 450 Plus 2424 and 3232
CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers
There are 12 CrossPoint 450 Plus series matrix sizes available, each in an HVA
(RGBHV video and audio) and HV (RGBHV video only) model:
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 84 (8 inputs by 4 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 88 (8 inputs by 8 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 816 (8 inputs by 16 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 124 (12 inputs by 4 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 128 (12 inputs by 8 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 168 (16 inputs by 8 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 1212 (12 inputs by 12 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 1616 (16 inputs by 16 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 2412 (24 inputs by 12 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 2424 (24 inputs by 24 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 3216 (32 inputs by 16 outputs)
• CrossPoint 450 Plus 3232 (32 inputs by 32 outputs)
The CrossPoint 450 Plus Series have a minimum bandwidth of 425 MHz (-3 dB).
All models can also switch RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component video,
S-video, and composite video.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
1-5
Introduction, cont’d
MAV Plus switchers
There are 61 different MAV Plus models available, in a combination of matrix sizes
and low resolution video formats, with or without audio or with audio only. The
various matrix sizes and video formats are as follows:
• MAV Plus 88 (8 inputs by 8 outputs)

HDA (component/HDTV video and audio)

HD (component/HDTV video only)

SVA (S-video and audio)

SV (S-video only)

AV (composite video and audio)

V (composite video only)

A (audio only)
• MAV Plus 128 (12 inputs by 8 outputs)

HDA

HD

SVA

SV

AV

V

A
• MAV Plus 128 AV RCA (12 inputs by 8 outputs)

AV (with RCA audio connectors)
• MAV Plus 816 (8 inputs by 16 outputs)

HDA

HD

SVA

SV

AV

V

A
• MAV Plus 164 (16 inputs by 4 outputs)

A
• MAV 168 Plus (16 inputs by 8 outputs)

SVA

SV

AV

V

A
• MAV 1212 Plus (12 inputs by 12 outputs)

SVA

SV

AV

V
• MAV 1616 Plus (16 inputs by 16 outputs)

HDA

HD

SVA

SV

AV

V

A
• MAV 2412 Plus (24 inputs by 12 outputs)

SVA

SV

AV

V

A
• MAV 2424 Plus (24 inputs by 24 outputs)
1-6

SVA

SV

AV

V

A
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
• MAV 3216 Plus (32 inputs by 16 outputs)

SVA

SV

AV

V

A
• MAV 3232 Plus (32 inputs by 32 outputs)

SVA

SV

AV

V

A
MAV Plus HDA and HD switchers can also route low resolution RGsB and RsGsBs
video signals. HDA and HD switchers can also route multiple composite video
planes or S-video and composite video. If used in this way, the various video
planes cannot be broken away; the input signals on the Y, R-Y, and B-Y input BNCs
must be routed to the same outputs.
MAV Plus SVA and SV switchers can also be used to switch two planes of
composite video. If used in this way, the two video planes cannot be broken away;
the input signals on the luma and chroma input BNCs must be routed to the same
outputs.
The MAV Plus Series have a bandwidth of 150 MHz (-3 dB).
Definitions
The following terms, which apply to Extron matrix switchers, are used throughout
this manual:
Tie — An input-to-output connection.
Set of ties — An input tied to two or more outputs. (An output can never be tied
to more than one input.)
Configuration — One or more ties or one or more sets of ties.
Current configuration — The configuration that is currently active in the
switcher (also called configuration 0)
Global memory preset — A configuration that has been stored. Up to 32 global
memory presets can be stored in memory. Preset locations are assigned to
the input buttons and (where necessary) output buttons. Up to 20 or 32
(depending on the number of input and output buttons) presets can be
selected from the front panel for either saving or retrieving. When a preset
is retrieved from memory, it becomes the current configuration. All models
have 32 presets; on models with fewer than 32 input and output buttons,
preset numbers that are too high to be available from the front panel are still
accessible under serial port or Ethernet control.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
1-7
Introduction, cont’d
Features
Video — All switchers input and output video on BNC connectors.
CrossPoint 450 Plus — These switchers input and output ultra-wideband
RGBHV or RGBS video. They can also switch RGsB, RsGsBs, component/
HDTV, S-video, or composite video.
MAV Plus — These switchers input and output NTSC 3.58, NTSC 4.43, PAL, or
SECAM video or HDTV video inputs. Depending on the video format of the
switcher, these switchers can distribute low resolution RGsB, RsGsGs,
component/HDTV, S-video, or composite video.
Bandwidth —
CrossPoint 450 Plus — The CrossPoint 450 Plus Series switchers provide a
minimum of 425 MHz (-3 dB) video bandwidth, fully loaded.
MAV Plus — The MAV Plus switchers provide a minimum of 150 MHz (-3 dB)
video bandwidth, fully loaded.
Audio inputs (audio models only) —
All audio models, with the exception of the MAV Plus 128 AV RCA — Input
and output stereo audio, balanced or unbalanced, on 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive
screw terminals.
MAV Plus 128 AV RCA — Input and output unbalanced stereo audio on left and
right RCA connectors.
Audio input gain/attenuation (audio models only) — Individual input audio
levels can be adjusted so there are no noticeable volume differences between
sources. Users can set the input level of audio gain or attenuation
(-18 dB to +24 dB) via the Ethernet link, either serial port link, or the front
panel.
Audio output volume (audio models) — The audio volume of each output can be
displayed and adjusted through a range of full output to completely silent
from the front panel or under serial port or Ethernet control.
1-8
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
Digital Sync Validation Processing (DSVP™) (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) —
In critical environments or unmanned, remote locations, it may be vital to
know that sources are active and switching. Extron’s DSVP confirms that
input sources are active by scanning all sync inputs for active signals. DSVP
provides instantaneous frequency feedback for composite sync or separate
horizontal and vertical sync signals via the switcher’s serial ports or Ethernet
port. The frequency information can be displayed on any control system or
in a Windows®-based control program on a local-area network (LAN) or
Internet (IP) connection (figure 1-3).
Input # 01
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Input Horz. Vert.
MATRIX INPUT STATUS
Input # 01
Input # 02
Input # 03
Input # 04
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Input # 05
Input # 06
Input # 07
Input # 08
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Input # 09
Input # 10
Input # 11
Input # 12
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
Signal: PRESENT
Sync Type: H&V
Vertical Freq.: 60 Hz
Horz Freq.: 31.5 kHz
01
31.50
60.00
02
31.50
60.00
03
31.50
60.00
04
48.01
67.50
Sample control system panel
05
48.01
67.50
OR
06
48.01
67.50
07
48.01
67.50
08
61.55
72.00
09
61.55
72.00
10
61.55
72.00
11
61.55
72.00
12
61.55
72.00
Windows-based control program
Figure 1-3 — DSVP data display
Rooming — Each switcher can be programmed to group multiple outputs to
specific “rooms”, allowing them to have their own presets.
Switching flexibility — Provides individually buffered, independent matrix
switched outputs with audio follow and audio breakaway for audio models.
•
Tie any input to any or all outputs
•
Quick multiple tie — Multiple inputs can be switched to multiple outputs
simultaneously. This allows all displays (outputs) to change from source to
source at the same time.
•
Audio follow — Audio can be switched with its corresponding video input
via front panel control or under Ethernet or serial port remote control.
•
Audio breakaway — Audio can be broken away from its corresponding
video signal. This feature allows any audio signal to be selected with any
video signal simultaneously to one or all outputs in any combination. Audio
breakaway switching can be done via front panel control or under Ethernet or
serial port remote control.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
1-9
Introduction, cont’d
Operational flexibility — Operations such as input/output selection, setting of
presets, and adjustment of audio levels can be performed on the front panel
or via the Ethernet or serial link. The serial links allow remote control via a
PC or control system. The Ethernet link allows multiple remote links with
two levels of password protection.
•
Front Panel Controller — The front panel controller supports input and
output selection, I/O grouping, preset creation and selection, RGB delay, and
audio gain and attenuation and volume control (audio models). The front
panel features illuminated pushbuttons that can be labeled with text or
graphics.
•
Windows-based control program — For serial port or Ethernet remote
control from a PC, the Extron Windows-based control software provides a
graphical interface and drag-and-drop/point-and-click operation. The
Windows-based control program also has an emulation mode that lets you
create a switcher configuration file at the home office and then download it
for use by the switcher on site.
•
Simple Instruction Set (SIS™) — The remote control protocol uses Extron’s
SIS for easy programming and operation.
•
Remote control panels and keypads — The matrix switchers are remote
controllable, using the optional MKP 2000 and MKP 3000 remote control
keypads. The remote control devices are easy to use and provide tactile
buttons for quick selection. Each MKP can be used for input-to-output
switching, one-touch switching for a particular output. The MKP 3000 also
can be used for selection of global presets.
Upgradeable firmware — The firmware that controls all switcher operation can be
upgraded in the field via either serial port or the Ethernet port, without
taking the switcher out of service. Firmware upgrades are available for
download on the Extron Web site, www.extron.com and they can be installed
using the Windows-based control program or built-in HTML pages.
Labeling — Extron’s button label software lets you create labels to place in the
front panel I/O buttons, with names, alphanumeric characters, or color
bitmaps for easy and intuitive input and output selection. Alternatively,
labels can be made with any Brother™ P-Touch™ or comparable labeler.
Global memory presets — 20 or 32 (depending on the model) global memory
presets are a time-saving feature that lets you set up and store input/output
configurations in advance. You can then recall those configurations, when
needed, with a few simple steps.
Rack mounting — Rack mountable in any conventional 19" wide rack.
Three front panel security lockout modes (Executive modes) — If a matrix
switcher is installed in an open area, where operation by unauthorized
personnel may be a problem, either of two security lockout modes can be
implemented (the third mode is unlocked). When a front panel locked mode
is enabled, a special button combination or SIS command is required to
unlock the front panel controller and make the front panel fully operational.
I/O grouping — Allows the matrix to be virtually divided into smaller
sub-switchers, making installation and control easier. I/O grouping limits
the selection of inputs and outputs to members of the same group.
I/O grouping allows specific outputs, such as those designated for a specific
purpose, to be grouped together.
1-10
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
Power — The matrix switchers’ 100 VAC to 240 VAC, internal power supply(s)
provides worldwide power compatibility.
Primary and redundant power supplies —
(CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus 2412, 2424, 3216, and 3232 switchers only)
Includes two internal 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, auto-switchable power
supplies, which provide worldwide power compatibility.
The power supply circuitry is configured to automatically switch over from
the primary supply to the hot redundant supply in the case of a failure.
The hot redundant power supply means high reliability for the system and
no loss of functionality should the primary supply fail; the redundant power
supply immediately assumes the load.
Power supply status LEDs —
(CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus 2412, 2424, 3216, and 3232 switchers only)
Front panel LEDs indicate the status of the primary and redundant power
supplies.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
1-11
Introduction, cont’d
This page was intentionally left blank.
1-12
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Matrix Switchers • Introduction
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers
2
Chapter Two
Installation
Mounting the Switcher
Rear Panel Views
Rear Panel Connections
Front Panel Configuration Port (Matrix Sizes up to 1616 Only)
Installation, cont’d
Installation
Mounting the Switcher
The matrix switchers are housed in rack-mountable, metal enclosures with 19" rack
ears. The amount of vertical rack space required for each switcher is as follows:
•
2U high enclosure
MAV Plus 84, 88, 124, and 128 HDA and HD

MAV Plus 84, 88, 124, 128, and 1212 SVA, and SV

MAV Plus 84, 88, 124, 128, 816, 1212, 168, and 1616 AV, AV RCA, V, and A

MAV Plus 164 A

•
3U high enclosure
CrossPoint 450 Plus 84, 88, 124, and 128 HV and HVA

MAV Plus 168, 816, and 1616 SVA and SV

•
4U high enclosure
MAV Plus 168, 816, and 1616 HDA and HD

•
5U high enclosure
MAV Plus 2412, 2424, 3216, 3232 AV, V, and A

•
6U high enclosure
CrossPoint 450 Plus 816, 168, and 1616 HV and HVA

•
•
8U high enclosure

CrossPoint 450 Plus 2412 and 2424 HV and HVA
10U high enclosure
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3216 and 3232 HV and HVA

UL requirements
The following Underwriters Laboratories (UL) requirements pertain to the
installation of the matrix switcher into a rack (figure 2-1).
1.
Elevated operating ambient temperature — If installed in a closed or multiunit rack assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack
environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consider
installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum
122 °F (50 °C) (CrossPoint 450 Plus) or 113 °F (45 °C (MAV Plus) ambient
temperature (Tma) specified by Extron.
2.
Reduced air flow — Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such
that the amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not
compromised.
3.
Mechanical loading — Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such
that a hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
4.
Circuit overloading — Consideration should be given to the connection of
the equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the
circuits might have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring.
Appropriate consideration of equipment nameplate ratings should be used
when addressing this concern.
5.
Reliable earthing (grounding) — Reliable earthing of rack-mounted
equipment should be maintained. Particular attention should be given to
supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g.
use of power strips.
Mounting instructions
1.
2-2
Insert the switcher into the rack, aligning the holes in the mounting bracket
with those in the rack.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
2.
Secure the switcher to the rack using the supplied bolts.
Rear Panel Views
All connectors for all switchers are on the rear panel. Figure 2-1 through figure 2-10
show a representative sampling of all of the matrix switchers described in this
manual. See “Connections”, on page 2-8, for connecting cables to the rear panel
connectors.
CAUTION
Use Electrostatic discharge precautions (be electrically grounded) when
making connections. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage
equipment, even if you cannot feel, see, or hear it.
CAUTION
Remove system power before making all connections.
CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers
Figure 2-1 shows the CrossPoint 450 Plus 3232 HVA RGB video and stereo audio
matrix switcher.
The CrossPoint 450 Plus 2412, 2424, and 3216 are housed in the same 10U or
similar 8U enclosure, but have fewer output connectors to accommodate their
smaller matrix sizes.
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
INPUTS
INPUTS
INPUTS
RED
GREEN
BLUE
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS
INPUTS
Ω
2
4
Ω
H
12345678
INPUTS
Ω
Ω
HV SYNC
12345678
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
4
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
29
30
31
32
4
2
L
1
R
L
2
R
L
3
R
L
4
R
L
5
R
L
6
R
L
7
R
L
8
R
L
9
R
L
10
R
L
11
R
L
12
R
L
13
R
L
14
R
L
15
R
L
16
R
L
17
R
L
18
R
L
19
R
L
20
R
L
21
R
L
22
R
L
23
R
L
24
R
L
25
R
L
26
R
L
27
R
L
28
R
L
29
R
L
30
R
L
31
R
L
32
R
L
1
R
L
2
R
L
3
R
L
4
R
L
5
R
L
6
R
L
7
R
L
8
R
L
9
R
L
10
R
L
11
R
L
12
R
L
13
R
L
14
R
L
15
R
L
16
R
L
9
R
L
10
R
L
11
R
L
12
R
L
13
R
L
14
R
L
15
R
L
16
R
L
25
R
L
26
R
L
27
R
L
28
R
L
29
R
L
30
R
L
31
R
L
32
R
I
N
P
U
T
S
®
US
10
ETHERNET
LINK ACT
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
9
REMOTE
RESET
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
RS 232/422
12
100-240V ~ 50/60Hz 1.2A MAX
ANAHEIM, CA
5
3
V SYNC
OUTPUTS
8
Figure 2-1 — CrossPoint 450 Plus 3232 HVA matrix switcher
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
2-3
Installation, cont’d
Figure 2-2 shows the CrossPoint 450 Plus 1616 HVA RGB video and stereo audio
matrix switcher.
The CrossPoint 450 Plus 816 and 168 are housed in the same 6U enclosure,
but have fewer output connectors to accommodate their smaller matrix sizes.
OUTPUTS
INPUTS
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
1
2
10
OUTPUTS
INPUTS
12
US
®
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
LAN
OUTPUTS
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
4
3
ACT LINK
RESET
INPUTS
9
8
5
Figure 2-2 — CrossPoint 450 Plus 1616 HVA matrix switcher
Figure 2-3 shows the CrossPoint 450 Plus 128 HVA RGB video and stereo audio
matrix switcher.
The CrossPoint 450 Plus 84, 88, and 124 are housed in the same 3U enclosure,
but have fewer output connectors to accommodate their smaller matrix sizes.
3
2
3
4
5
6
INPUTS
7
8
9
10
11
R
G
G
B
B
H
H
V
V
OUTPUTS
5
4
6
7
8
2
10
RESET
LAN
1
R
3
2
1
12
ACT LINK
1
9
H SYNC V SYNC
®
US
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
SYNC INPUTS
INPUTS
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUTPUTS
8
9
10
11
12
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
Figure 2-3 — CrossPoint 450 Plus 128 HVA matrix switcher
2-4
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
7
8
8
MAV Plus switchers
Figure 2-4 shows the MAV Plus 3232 SVA S-video and stereo audio switcher.
The MAV Plus 2412, 2424, and 3216 are housed in a similar 8U enclosure,
but have fewer input and/or output connectors to accommodate their smaller
matrix sizes.
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
1
29
5
9
13
17
21
25
29
ANAHEIM, CA
2
6
10
14
18
22
26
30
3
7
11
15
19
23
27
31
32
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
25
29
1
5
9
13
17
21
25
29
26
30
2
6
10
14
18
22
26
30
3
7
11
15
19
23
27
31
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
2
6
10
14
18
22
26
30
3
7
11
15
19
23
27
31
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
1
5
9
13
17
21
2
6
10
14
18
22
I
N
P
U
T
S
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
Y
1
2
31
28
24
C
32
L
1
R
L
2
R
L
3
R
L
4
R
L
5
R
L
6
R
L
7
R
L
8
R
L
17
R
L
18
R
L
19
R
L
20
R
L
21
R
L
22
R
L
23
R
L
24
R
L
1
R
L
2
R
L
3
R
L
4
R
L
5
R
L
6
R
L
7
R
L
8
R
L
17
R
L
18
R
L
19
R
L
20
R
L
21
R
L
22
R
L
23
R
L
24
R
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
L
9
R
L
10
R
L
11
R
L
12
R
L
13
R
L
14
R
L
15
R
L
16
R
L
25
R
L
26
R
L
27
R
L
28
R
L
29
R
L
30
R
L
31
R
L
32
R
L
9
R
L
10
R
L
11
R
L
12
R
L
13
R
L
14
R
L
15
R
L
16
R
L
25
R
L
26
R
L
27
R
L
28
R
L
29
R
L
30
R
L
31
R
L
32
R
12
100-240V
50/60Hz
1.2A MAX.
5
11
RESET SYNC
20
16
27
23
10
9
RS232/RS422
4
12
19
LAN
8
4
15
11
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
REMOTE
7
3
I
N
P
U
T
S
8
LISTED
US 1T23
I.T.E.
®
Figure 2-4 — MAV Plus 3232 SVA matrix switcher
Figure 2-5 shows a portion of the MAV Plus 3232 V composite video matrix
switcher without audio and a portion of the MAV Plus 3232 A audio-only matrix
switcher.
Both of these switchers feature the same matrix size as figure 2-4, but with
composite video format and without audio and in a 5U enclosure.
MAV Plus 3232 V
1
5
MAV Plus 3232 A
13
9
17
21
25
25
ANAHEIM, CA
1
ANAHEIM, CA
2
6
10
14
18
22
26
26
3
7
11
15
19
23
27
27
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
28
4
12
L
1
R
L
2
R
L
3
R
L
4
R
L
5
R
L
6
R
L
7
R
L
9
R
L
10
R
L
11
R
L
12
R
L
13
R
L
14
R
L
15
R
L
17
R
L
18
R
L
19
R
L
20
R
L
21
R
L
22
R
L
23
R
L
25
R
L
26
R
L
27
R
L
28
R
L
29
R
L
30
R
L
31
R
12
100-240V
50/60Hz
1.2A MAX.
®
US
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
100-240V
50/60Hz
1.2A MAX.
®
US
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
Figure 2-5 — MAV Plus 3232 matrix switchers with various formats
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
2-5
Installation, cont’d
Figure 2-6 shows a MAV Plus 1616 HDA component/HDTV video and stereo audio
switcher.
The rear panel of the MAV Plus 816 and 168 models have the same features as
the MAV Plus 1616 series models (figure 2-6 and figure 2-7), with the
exception of fewer inputs or outputs.
3
5
2
4
6
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
8
R-Y INPUTS
7
8
B-Y INPUTS
7
8
Y OUTPUTS
9
7
11
13
15
1
3
5
10
12
14
16
2
4
6
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
10
12
14
16
2
4
6
9
11
13
15
1
3
5
10
12
14
16
2
4
6
8
10
R-Y OUTPUTS
9
7
8
10
B-Y OUTPUTS
9
7
8
10
11
13
15
12
14
16
11
13
15
12
14
16
11
13
15
12
14
16
2
SYN
11
RESET
Y INPUTS
9
7
1
LAN
1
US
®
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
3
2
5
7
6
4
11
9
10
8
12
15
13
16
14
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
I
N
P
U
T
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
4
10
9
REMOTE
RS232/RS422
12
8
5
Figure 2-6 — MAV Plus 1616 HDA matrix switcher
Figure 2-7 shows a portion of the MAV Plus 1616 SVA S-video and stereo audio
matrix switcher, a portion of the MAV Plus 1616 V composite video matrix switcher
without audio, and a portion of the MAV Plus 1616 A audio-only matrix switcher.
All of these switchers feature the same matrix size as figure 2-6, but with
different video formats and with or without audio.
MAV Plus 1616 V
1
3
5
INPUTS
7
9
2
4
6
8
10
1
MAV Plus 1616 SVA
®
1
3
5
2
4
6
1
3
5
2
4
6
Y INPUTS
9
7
8
LISTED
US 1T23
I.T.E.
12
10
1
®
12
LISTED
US 1T23
I.T.E.
C INPUTS
7
8
9
10
MAV Plus 1616 A
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
8
10
12
14 T
I
N
P
U
®
US
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
S
12
4
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
I
N
P
U
T
S
4
Figure 2-7 — MAV Plus 1616 matrix switchers with various formats
Figure 2-8 shows a MAV Plus 128 AV RCA composite video and stereo audio (with
inputs and outputs on RCA connectors) matrix switcher.
2-6
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
OUTPUTS
INPUTS
1
2
3
5
4
7
6
9
8
10
12
11
1
3
2
5
4
7
6
8
LAN
12
®
US
2
4
3
5
6
8
7
9
10
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
6
11
10
9
8
REMOTE
1
RESET SYNC
2
RS232/RS422
1
8
7
Figure 2-8 — MAV Plus 128 AV RCA matrix switcher
Figure 2-9 shows a MAV Plus 128 HDA component/HDTV video and stereo audio
matrix switcher.
The MAV Plus 88 models are housed in the same 2U enclosure, but have fewer
input and/or output connectors to accommodate the different matrix sizes they
provide.
3
5
4
7
6
9
8
10
1
12
11
12
1
®
US
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
3
2
5
4
7
6
8
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
I
N
P
U
T
S
LAN
11
10
9
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
4
REMOTE
2
RS232/RS422
1
1
RESET SYNC
2
8
5
Figure 2-9 — MAV Plus 128 HDA matrix switcher
Figure 2-10 shows a portion of the MAV Plus 128 SV S-video matrix switcher
without audio, a portion of the MAV Plus 128 AV composite video and stereo audio
matrix switcher, and a portion of the MAV Plus 128 A audio-only matrix switcher.
All of these switchers feature the same matrix size as figure 2-9, but with
different video formats and with or without audio.
MAV Plus 128 AV
1
1
1
2
3
3
5
4
7
6
12
MAV Plus 128 SV
1
2
1
4
5
6
7
®
US
2
3
4
5
6
7
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
4
MAV Plus 128 A
12
1
®
US
2
3
5
4
7
6
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
12
1
®
US
2
3
4
5
6
7
LISTED
1T23
I.T.E.
4
Figure 2-10 — MAV Plus 128 matrix switchers with various formats
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
2-7
Installation, cont’d
Rear Panel Connections
CAUTION
Use Electrostatic discharge precautions (be electrically grounded) when
making connections. Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage
equipment, even if you cannot feel, see, or hear it.
CAUTION
Remove system power before making all connections.
Video input and output (video switchers)
The switchers do not alter the video signal in any way. The signal output by
the switcher is in the same format as the input.
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only)
The switcher can connect to up to as many as 32 RGBHV video sources, depending
on the model. The switcher can output to as many as 32 RGBHV video devices,
depending on the model.
On CrossPoint 450 Plus matrix sizes of 8 x 16 and larger, the connectors for
each video plane are grouped together (all of the red inputs grouped together,
all of the green inputs grouped, and so on). Ensure that you connect the input
on each video plane to the corresponding connector in the correct group (see
figure 2-11).
The CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers can also switch RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs,
component video, S-video, or composite video by using four, three, two, or one
BNC(s). If switching a video format other than RGBHV, ensure that the same
video planes (R, G, B, H/HV, and/or V) are used on the switcher output as on
the input.
2-8
1
Video inputs — Connect RGB video, component/HDTV video, S-video, or
composite video inputs, as applicable, to these BNC connectors for each input.
Figure 2-11 shows how to connect the RGB video format to each
configuration.
2
Video outputs — Connect RGB video, component/HDTV video, S-video, or
composite video displays, as applicable, or other devices to these BNC
connectors for each output. Figure 2-11 shows how to connect the RGB video
format to each configuration.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
CrossPoint 450 Plus
2412, 2424, 3216, 3232
Input 1
1
2
3
4
3
INPUTS
INPUTS
RED
GREEN
OUTPUTS
1
2
1
2
3
4
2
1
3
3
4
1
INPUTS
OUTPUTS
4
1
2
3
2
3
4
1
INPUTS
H
HV SYNC
BLUE
OUTPUTS
4
2
1
1
2
3
3
4
INPUTS
V SYNC
OUTPUTS
4
2
OUTPUTS
4
1
2
3
4
Output 1
1
Input or
Output 1
1
Input or
Output 1
R
2
G
1
B
2
H
1
V
2
CrossPoint 450 Plus
84, 88, 124, 128
1
2
1
2
CrossPoint 450 Plus
816, 168, 1212, 1616
Figure 2-11 — CrossPoint 450 Plus RGB connections
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
2-9
Installation, cont’d
Video (MAV Plus switchers only)
Video input and output connections are made with female BNC connectors.
Some video input and output devices do not have BNC video output
connectors. For these cases, a suitable cable or connector adapter is necessary.
The part number for the Extron RCA-to-BNC adapter is 10-229-01.
The connectors for each video plane are grouped together (for example, for
component/HDTV switchers, all of the Y inputs grouped together, all of the
R-Y inputs grouped, and so on). Ensure that you connect the input on each
video plane to the corresponding connector in the correct group (figure 2-12,
through figure 2-14, below and on the next page).
The switcher can connect to up to as many as 32 S-video or composite video or up
to 16 component/HDTV video, S-video, or composite video sources, depending on
the model. The switcher can output to as many as 32 S-video or composite video or
up to 16 component video, S-video, or composite video devices, depending on the
model.
1
Video inputs — Connect component/HDTV video (figure 2-12),
S-video (figure 2-13), or composite video (figure 2-14) inputs, as applicable, to
these BNC connectors for each input.
2
Video outputs — Connect component/HDTV video (figure 2-12),
S-video (figure 2-13), or composite video (figure 2-14) displays, as applicable,
or other devices to these BNC connectors for each output. Figure 2-14 shows
how to connect the various video formats to each MAV Plus configuration.
The S-video (figure 2-13) and composite video (figure 2-14) connection
drawings are all on the next page.
1
2
1
2
1
2
Y INPUTS
7
1
8
R-Y INPUTS
7
8
B-Y INPUTS
7
MAV Plus 88, 128
HDA and HD
Composite/HDTV video
8
MAV Plus 816, 168, 1616
HDA and HD
Component/HDTV video
Figure 2-12 — MAV Plus component/HDTV video connections
2-10
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
1
21
1
21
2
22
3
23
Y INPUTS
1
7
2
8
Y
2
22
23
3
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
I
N
P
U
T
S
4
24
4
24
1
21
1
21
2
22
3
23
4
24
C INPUTS
1
7
2
8
MAV Plus
816, 168, 1212, 1616 SVA and SV
S-video
C
1
2
22
3
23
4
24
I
N
P
U
T
S
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
MAV Plus 2412, 2424,
3216, 3232 SVA and SV
S-video
MAV Plus 88, 128, 1212
SVA and SV
S-video
Figure 2-13 — MAV Plus S-video connections
1
21
1
21
2
22
2
22
3
23
4
24
1
1
2
3
23
4
24
I
N
P
U
T
S
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
MAV Plus
816, 168, 1212, 1616 AV and V
Composite video
MAV Plus 88, 128
HDA and HD
Composite video
MAV Plus 2412, 2424,
3216, 3232 AV and V
Composite video
Figure 2-14 — MAV Plus video connections
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
2-11
Installation, cont’d
Sync termination switches (CrossPoint 450 Plus only)
3
Sync termination switches — The CrossPoint 450 Plus matrix switchers have
sync termination switches on the rear panel for inputs 1 through 8
(CrossPoint 450 Plus 2412, 2424, 3216, and 3232) or inputs 1 through 4
(CrossPoint 450 Plus 84, 88, 124, 128, 816, 168, 1212, 1616). The switches
(figure 2-15) provide a way to condition non-TTL sync levels greater than
5 Vp-p, enabling the sync to be properly passed from input to selected
output(s). The matrix switchers have two sets of sync termination switches;
one for horizontal or combined sync and a second set for vertical sync.
INPUTS
INPUTS
Ω
Ω
Ω
H
12345678
Ω
HV SYNC
12345678
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
V SYNC
OUTPUTS
4
1
2
4
3
CrossPoint 450 Plus
2412, 2424, 3216, and 3232
15
16
V
V
15
H SYNC V SYNC
16
CrossPoint 450 Plus
84, 88, 124, and 128
CrossPoint 450 Plus
816, 168, 1212, and 1616
Figure 2-15 — Sync termination switches
Each switch provides the option of selecting either 510 ohms or 75 ohms.
The 75 ohms position is required only for an input with non-TTL sync, greater
than 5 V p-p. The normal position is 510 ohms.
An input that produces an out of sync display, a display that is rolling
vertically and/or tearing horizontally, could indicate a non-TTL sync input.
A device that is known to output non-TTL sync levels (greater than 5V p-p)
should be connected to one of the inputs with sync termination switches, and
the switches for that input should be set to the 75 ohm position. If you are not
sure, check the specifications in the user’s manual for the input device.
2-12
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
Audio input and output (models with audio only)
By default, the audio ties follow the video ties. Audio breakaway, which can be
activated via the front panel or under Ethernet or serial port control, allows you to
select from any one of the audio input sources and route it separately from its
corresponding video source. See chapter 3, “Operation”, chapter 4, “Programmer’s
Guide”, chapter 5, “Matrix Software”, and chapter 6, “HTML Operation” for
details.
Captive screw connector models (all except MAV Plus 128 AV RCA)
4
Connections for balanced and unbalanced audio inputs — Each input has a
3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw connector for balanced or unbalanced stereo
audio input. Connectors are included with each switcher, but you must
supply the audio cable. See figure 2-16 to wire a connector for the appropriate
input type. Use the supplied tie-wrap to strap the audio cable to the extended
tail of the connector. High impedance is generally over 800 ohms.
R
Do not tin the wires!
R
Tip
Sleeve
Tip
Ring
Sleeve (s)
Tip
Ring
L
L
Tip
Sleeve
Unbalanced Stereo Input
Balanced Stereo Input
(high impedance)
(high impedance)
Figure 2-16 — Captive screw connector wiring for audio inputs
CAUTION
The length of the exposed (stripped) portion of the copper wires is
important. The ideal length is 3/16" (5 mm). Longer bare wires can
short together. Shorter bare wires are not as secure in the direct insertion
connectors and could be pulled out.
CAUTION
The captive screw audio connector can easily be inadvertently plugged
partially into one receptacle and partially into an adjacent receptacle. This
misconnection could damage the audio output circuits. Ensure that the
connector is plugged fully and only into the desired input or output.
See figure 2-17 to identify the tip, ring, and sleeve when you are making
connections for the switcher from existing audio cables. A mono audio
connector consists of the tip and sleeve. A stereo audio connector consists of
the tip, ring and sleeve. The ring, tip, and sleeve wires are also shown on the
captive screw audio connector diagrams, figure 2-16 and figure 2-18.
Tip (+)
Sleeve ( )
RCA Connector
Tip (+)
Ring (-)
Sleeve ( )
3.5 mm Stereo Plug Connector
(balanced)
Figure 2-17 — Typical audio connectors
The audio level for each input can be individually set via the front panel or
Ethernet or serial port control to ensure that the level on the output does not
vary from input to input. See chapter 3, “Operation”, chapter 4,
“Programmer’s Guide”, chapter 5, “Matrix Software”, and chapter 6, “HTML
Operation” for details.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
2-13
Installation, cont’d
5
Connections for balanced and unbalanced audio outputs — These 3.5 mm,
5-pole captive screw connectors output the selected unamplified, line level
audio. Connect audio devices, such as an audio amplifier or powered
speakers. See figure 2-18 to properly wire an output connector. Use the
supplied tie-wrap to strap the audio cable to the extended tail of the
connector.
NO GROUND HERE.
Do not tin the wires!
Unbalanced Stereo Output
Tip
Ring
Sleeve(s)
Tip
Ring
R
Sleeve(s)
Tip
L
Tip
NO GROUND HERE.
Balanced Stereo Output
Figure 2-18 — Captive screw connector wiring for audio output
CAUTION
Connect the sleeve to ground (Gnd). Connecting the sleeve to a negative
(-) terminal will damage the audio output circuits.
CAUTION
The length of the exposed (stripped) portion of the copper wires is
important. The ideal length is 3/16" (5 mm). Longer bare wires can
short together. Shorter bare wires are not as secure in the direct insertion
connectors and could be pulled out.
The volume level for each output can be individually set via the front panel or
Ethernet or serial port control. See chapter 3, “Operation”, chapter 4,
“Programmer’s Guide”, chapter 5, “Matrix Software”, and chapter 6, “HTML
Operation” for details.
RCA connector model (MAV Plus 128 AV RCA)
6
Connections for unbalanced audio inputs — Each input has a pair, left and
right, of female RCA connectors for unbalanced stereo audio input.
7
Connections for unbalanced audio outputs — Each output has a pair, left
and right, of female RCA connectors for unbalanced stereo audio output.
RS-232/RS-422
8
RS-232/RS-422 connector — Connect a host device, such as a computer, touch
panel control, or RS-232 capable PDA to the switcher via this 9-pin D
connector for serial RS-232/RS-422 control (figure 2-19).
1
5
6
9
RS232/RS422
REMOTE
All Models
84 through 1616
Matrix Sizes
2412 through 3232
Matrix Sizes
Pin RS-232 Function
RS-422 Function
RS-422 Function
1
— Not used
—
Not used
TX+ Transmit data (+)
2
TX Transmit data
TX– Transmit data (–) TX– Transmit data (–)
3
RX Receive data
RX– Receive data (–) RX+ Receive data (+)
4
— Not used
—
Not used
RX– Receive data (–)
5
Gnd Signal ground Gnd Signal ground
Gnd Signal Ground
Not used
6
— Not used
—
Not used
—
Not used
7
— Not used
RX+ Receive data (+)
—
Not used
8
— Not used
TX+ Transmit data (+)
—
Not used
9
— Not used
—
Not used
—
Figure 2-19 — RS-232/RS-422 connector
See chapter 4, “Programmer’s Guide”, for definitions of the SIS commands
(serial commands to control the switcher via this connector) and chapter 5,
“Matrix Software” for details on how to install and use the control software.
2-14
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
The switcher can support either the RS-232 or RS-422 serial communication
protocol, and operate at 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200 baud rates.
See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate” in chapter 3,
“Operation”, to configure the RS-232/RS-422 port from the front panel.
If desired, connect an MKP 2000 or MKP 3000 remote control panel to the
switcher’s RS-232/RS-422 connector. Refer to the “MKP 2000 Remote Control
Panel User’s Manual” or the “MKP 3000 Remote Control Panel User ’s
Manual” for details.
Ethernet
LINK ACT
Ethernet port — If desired, for IP control of the system, connect the matrix
switcher to a PC or to an Ethernet LAN, via this RJ-45 connector.
You can use a PC to control the networked switcher with SIS
commands from anywhere in the world. You can also control the
switcher from a PC that is either running Extron’s windows-based
control program or that has downloaded HTML pages from the
switcher.
ETHERNET
9
Ethernet connection indicators — The Link and Act LEDs indicate
the status of the Ethernet connection. The Link LED indicates that
the switcher is properly connected to an Ethernet LAN. This LED
should light steadily. The Act LED indicates transmission of data
packets on the RJ-45 connector. This LED should flicker as the
switcher communicates.
Cabling and RJ-45 connector wiring
It is vital that your Ethernet cables be the correct cables, and that they be properly
terminated with the correct pinout. Ethernet links use Category (CAT) 5e or CAT 6,
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) or shielded twisted pair (STP) cables, terminated
with RJ-45 connectors. Ethernet cables are limited to a length 328’ (100 m).
Do not use standard telephone cables. Telephone cables will not support
Ethernet or Fast Ethernet.
Do not stretch or bend cables. Transmission errors can occur.
The cable used depends on your network speed. The switcher supports both
10 Mbps (10Base-T — Ethernet) and 100 Mbps (100Base-T — Fast Ethernet),
half-duplex and full-duplex, Ethernet connections.
•
10Base-T Ethernet requires CAT 3 UTP or STP cable at minimum.
•
100Base-T Fast Ethernet requires CAT 5e UTP or STP cable at minimum.
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover
cable and must be properly terminated for your application (figure 2-20).
•
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher.
•
Patch (straight) cable — Connection of the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus
switcher to an Ethernet LAN.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
2-15
Installation, cont’d
Patch (straight) cable
Side 1
Wire color
Pin
Side
RJ-45
connector
Insert
Twisted
Pair Wires
Pin
Side 2
Wire color
1
White-orange
1
White-orange
2
Orange
2
Orange
3
White-green
3
White-green
4
Blue
4
Blue
5
White-blue
5
White-blue
6
Green
6
Green
7
White-brown
7
White-brown
8
Brown
8
Brown
Crossover cable
Side 1
Wire color
Pin
1
White-orange
Pin
Side 2
Wire color
1
White-green
Green
2
Orange
2
3
White-green
3
White-orange
4
Blue
4
Blue
5
White-blue
5
White-blue
6
Green
6
Orange
7
White-brown
7
White-brown
8
Brown
8
Brown
Figure 2-20 — RJ-45 connector and pinout tables
Reset button — The Reset button initiates four levels of reset to the
matrix switcher. Press and hold the button while the switcher is
running or while you power up the switcher for different reset
levels.
LAN
10
RESET
Reset button
See “Reset button” in chapter 3, “Operation”, for details.
•
Events (mode 3) reset — Hold Reset for 3 seconds then release and push
again to toggle events monitoring on and off.
•
IP settings (mode 4) reset — Hold Reset for 6 seconds then release and
push again to reset the switcher’s IP functions.
IP settings reset does not replace any user-installed firmware.
•
Absolute (mode 5) reset — Hold Reset for 9 seconds then release and
push again to restore the switcher to the default factory conditions.
•
Hard reset — Hold Reset while powering up the switcher to restore the
switcher to the default factory conditions.
Hard reset does not clear the current configuration.
2-16
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
External sync (MAV Plus video models only)
The MAV Plus switcher switches between inputs during the vertical interval
period, resulting in glitch-free video switching. The MAV switcher can use an
external signal to synchronize switching during the vertical interval. Without the
external sync locking feature, switching between inputs can result in a brief rolling
(sync loss) or a brief change in the picture size.
11
Ext(ernal) Sync connector — Connect an external sync signal to this BNC
connection for genlocking the video signal in broadcast or other sync-critical
applications.
Figure 2-21 shows a basic external sync configuration. The Ext Sync
connector receives the timing signal. A tee connector on the connector allows
the signal to be passed on to another video device, if required. Terminate the
tee connector if desired.
Extron
BBG 6 A
BBG 6 A
12V
0.5A MAX
1 KHZ AUDIO
+4dBu
1
L
R
NTSC
BLACK BURST/COLOR BAR
/AUDIO GENERATOR
POWER
1
3
5
2
4
6
Black Burst Color Bar
Audio Generator
OUT
ON
1 2 3
-10dBV PAL
BLACKBURST/
COLORBAR
BLACKBURST
Connect to
MAV Plus AV 3232.
EXT
SYNC
Tee-connector
LINK
ACT
RS232/RS-422
REMOTE
ETHERNET
RESET
Terminate cable or
connect to another device.
Extron
MAV Plus 3232
Matrix Switcher
Figure 2-21 — Simple external sync connection example
Figure 2-22 shows another configuration, in which the timing source passes
through three video cameras and a video scan converter before connecting to
the switcher. This type of video camera is capable of synchronizing with the
external timing source for video editing applications.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
2-17
Installation, cont’d
Extron
VSC 900D
Monitor
Extron
BBG 6 A
Computer-to-Video
Scan Converter
VCR
Extron
MAV Plus AV 3232
VGA Input
Matrix Switcher
IN
D1
EO
G
E
N
L
O
C
K
232
RS/422
OUT
VID
DEO
S-VI
V
-Y
H/H
-Y
B/B
Black Burst/Color Bar/
Audio Generator
G/Y
V
H
/HV
29
25
30
19
28
15
2
29
25
21
30
17
26
13
22
9
M,
23
10
20
16
L
L
L
L
L
2
9
L
17
L
25
L
10
L
18
L
26
4
11
12
R
19
L
27
L
13
L
21
L
20
L
28
L
29
L
14
L
22
7
L
15
L
23
L
30
L
16
L
24
L
32
R
R
R
R
I
N
P
U
T
S
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
9
L
17
L
25
3
11
18
26
L
L
19
L
27
13
20
R
28
14
L
22
21
29
7
L
30
8
EXT C
SYN
R
R
R
ACT
L
15
L
23
L
16
L
24
R
LINK
R
R
R
R
R
R
L
L
L
L
L
R
R
R
6
R
R
R
R
L
L
12
R
R
L
5
R
L
L
10
4
R
R
31
32
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
L
8
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
6
R
R
R
R
R
L
5
R
R
L
L
L
3
R
R
2
R
28
12
L
1
1
L
8
4
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
7
3
z
50/60H
0V MAX.
100-24
1.2A
L
12
8
4
24
20
ETHERNET
L
16
3
L
RS-232/RS-422
24
11
7
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
L
15
11
HEI
I
N
P
U
T
S
32
19
6
ANA
27
14
2
CA
31
18
5
1
RGB
32
28
ETHERNET
6
16
12
23
19
8
4
ER
IFI
PL
N AM
TIO
IBU
I
N
P
U
T
S
Hz
50/60
27
14
10
REMOTE
31
RS-232/RS-422
5
TR
DIS
100-2
LINK
30
26
22
18
24
1
-Y
R/R
,Y
/R-Y
RGB
ACT
29
25
21
17
20
7
3
0.3A
40V
EXT C
SYN
12
8
REMOTE
19
15
11
ANA
24
20
16
3
4
32
9
6
2
, CA
HEIM
28
15
11
7
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
R
/R-Y
32
13
23
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
V
H
/HV
B
/B-Y
G-Y
, B-Y
23
10
6
I
N
P
U
T
S
31
27
R
/R-Y
31
27
1
2
30
26
22
18
14
10
G
/Y
26
22
18
14
1
29
25
21
17
13
9
5
1
B
/B-Y
2
21
17
13
9
5
31
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Hz
50/60
40V
MAX.
100-2
1.2A
Video Camera
Video Camera
Video Camera
Figure 2-22 — Multiple device external sync connection example
If no external sync timing source is connected to the switcher, switching occurs
immediately.
Power
12
AC power connector — Plug a standard IEC power cord into this connector
to connect the switcher to a 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz power source.
Front Panel Configuration Port
(Matrix Sizes up to 1616 Only)
13
CONTROL
ENTER
PRESET
VIEW
I/O
ESC
VIDEO
AUDIO
CONFIG
CROSSPOINT 450 PLUS SERIES
ULTRA-WIDEBAND MATRIX SWITCHER WITH ADSP™ AND IP LINK™
Figure 2-23 — Front panel configuration port
13
2-18
Configuration port — This 2.5 mm mini stereo jack serves the same serial
communications function as the rear panel Remote port, but it is easier to
access than the rear port after the matrix switcher has been installed and
cabled. The optional 9-pin D to 2.5 mm mini jack TRS RS-232 cable,
part #70-335-01 (figure 2-24), can be used for this connection.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
6 feet
(1.8 m)
Part #70-335-01
1
6
9
5
Tip
Ring
Sleeve (Gnd)
9-pin D
Connection
TRS Plug
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 5
Computer's RX line
Computer's TX line
Computer's signal ground
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
Figure 2-24 — Optional 9-pin TRS RS-232 cable
This port is independent of the rear panel Remote port and is not affected by
changes to the rear panel port’s protocol. This front panel port’s protocol can
be changed, under SIS command control only. See the Command/Response
table for IP SIS commands, in chapter 4, “Programmer’s Guide”, to configure
all ports under SIS control.
A front panel Configuration port connection and a rear panel Remote port
connection can both be active at the same time.
This port is RS-232 only, with its default protocols as follows:
• 9600 baud
• no parity
• 1 stop bit
• no flow control
• 8 data bits
The maximum distances from the matrix switcher to the controlling device can
vary up to 200 feet (61 m). Factors such as cable gauge, baud rates,
environment, and output levels (from the switcher and the controlling device)
all affect transmission distance. Distances of about 50 feet (15 m) are typically
not a problem. In some cases the matrix switcher may be capable of serial
communications via RS-232 up to 250 feet (76 m) away.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
2-19
Installation, cont’d
This page was intentionally left blank.
2-20
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Installation
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers
3
Chapter Three
Operation
Front Panel Controls and Indicators
Front Panel Operations
Rear Panel Controls
Optimizing the Audio (Audio Switchers)
Troubleshooting
Configuration Worksheets
Operation, cont’d
Operation
The operation of the CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers and MAV Plus switchers
is very similar. There are two exceptions:
•
The video selection button is labeled “RGBHV” on the
CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers and “Video” on the MAV Plus switchers.
•
The MAV Plus switchers do not offer RGB delay switching.
Front Panel Controls and Indicators
The front panel controls (figure 3-1 through figure 3-3) are grouped into two sets.
The input and output buttons are grouped on the left side of the control panel. The
control buttons and video/audio (I/O) selection buttons are grouped on the right
side of the panel.
While the number of inputs and outputs varies depending on the size of the
matrix, there are only three front panel arrangements: 12 input buttons by 8
output buttons (figure 3-1), 16 by 16 (figure 3-2), and 32 by 32 (figure 3-3).
See the table below to identify the front panel arrangements used by each
switcher model.
On smaller matrix switchers, the larger-numbered buttons are not used for
input and output selection, although they are used to select and indicate preset
numbers, indicate the input audio level, and indicate the output audio volume.
Switcher
model
Panel
12 x 8 16 x 16 32 x 32 Figure
CrossPoint 450 Plus
84, 88, 124, 128
MAV Plus
88, 128
3-1
CrossPoint 450 Plus
MAV Plus
816, 1212, 1616
3-2
CrossPoint 450 Plus
MAV Plus
2412, 2424, 3216, 3232
3-3
INPUTS
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONTROL
OUTPUTS
ENTER
PRESET
VIEW
I/O
ESC
VIDEO
AUDIO
CONFIG
CROSSPOINT 450 PLUS SERIES
ULTRA-WIDEBAND MATRIX SWITCHER WITH ADSP™ AND IP LINK™
3 4 5 6
Figure 3-1 — Front panel, CrossPoint 450 Plus 128 HVA
3-2
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
7 8
INPUTS
1
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CONTROL
OUTPUTS
ENTER
PRESET
I/O
ESC
VIEW
VIDEO
AUDIO
CONFIG
MAV PLUS SERIES
AV MATRIX SWITCHER WITH IP LINK™
3 4 5 6
7 8
Figure 3-2 — Front Panel, MAV Plus 1616 HDA
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
6
1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
I/O
CONTROL
ENTER PRESET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VIEW
ESC
RGBHV AUDIO
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2
POWER SUPPLY
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
PRIMARY
REDUNDANT
9
CROSSPOINT 450 PLUS SERIES
ULTRA-WIDEBAND MATRIX SWITCHER WITH ADSP ™ AND IP LINK ™
Figure 3-3 — CrossPoint 450 Plus 3232 series front panel
The large, illuminated push buttons can be labeled with text and/or graphics. The
buttons can be set to provide amber background illumination all the time or the
background illumination can be turned off (see “Background illumination”, on
page 3-50. The buttons blink or are lit at full intensity (depending on the operation)
when selected.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-3
Operation, cont’d
Definitions
The following terms, which apply to Extron matrix switchers, are used throughout
this manual:
Tie — An input-to-output connection.
Set of ties — An input tied to two or more outputs. (An output can never be tied
to more than one input.)
Configuration — One or more ties or one or more sets of ties.
Current configuration — The configuration that is currently active in the
switcher (also called configuration 0)
Global memory preset — A configuration that has been stored. Up to 32 global
memory presets can be stored in memory. Preset locations are assigned to
the input buttons and (where necessary) output buttons. Up to 20 or 32
(depending on the number of input and output buttons) presets can be
selected from the front panel for either saving or retrieving. When a preset
is retrieved from memory, it becomes the current configuration. All models
have 32 presets; on models with fewer than 32 input and output buttons,
preset numbers that are too high to be available from the front panel are still
accessible under serial port or Ethernet control.
Room — A subset of outputs that are logically related to each other, as
determined by the operator. The switchers support up to 10 rooms, each of
which can consist of from 1 to 16 outputs.
Room memory preset — A configuration consisting of outputs in a single room
that has been stored. When a room preset is retrieved from memory, it
becomes the current configuration.
Input and output buttons
If the switcher has fewer inputs or outputs than input or output buttons, only
the buttons for which the switcher has an input or output perform the function
of selecting and identifying that input or output.
1
3-4
Input buttons — The input buttons have two primary functions (•) and five
secondary (❏) functions:
•
Select an input.
•
Identify the selected input.
❏
(Input 1 only) With the Output 1 button, select I/O Group mode. See
“I/O grouping” on page 3-21.
❏
Select a preset. See “Using presets” on page 3-28.
❏
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers, Input 1 through 10 only) Display the
RGB delay. See “Setting RGB delay (CrossPoint 450 Plus Switchers)” on
page 3-26.
❏
(Audio models) Display the output volume level. See “Viewing and
adjusting the output volume (audio models)” on page 3-41.
❏
(Input 1 and Input 2 only) Toggle background illumination of the
buttons off and on. See “Background illumination” on page 3-50.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
2
Output buttons — The output buttons have two primary functions (•) and
four secondary (❏) functions:
•
Select output(s).
•
Identify the selected output(s).
❏
(Output 1 only) With the Input 1 button, select I/O Group mode. See
“I/O grouping” on page 3-21.
❏
(8 x 4, 8 x 8, 12 x 4, 12 x 8, 12 x 12, and 1616 matrix sizes only) Select a
preset. See “Using presets” on page 3-28.
❏
Mute the output. See “Muting and unmuting video and/or audio
outputs” on page 3-32.
❏
(Audio models) Display the audio level of the selected input. See
“Viewing and adjusting the input audio level (audio models)” on
page 3-35.
Control buttons
3
Enter button — The Enter button has three primary functions (•) and six
secondary (❏) functions:
•
Save changes that you make on the front panel. To create a simple
configuration:
Specify RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or video
(MAV Plus switchers), audio, or both (see I/O selection buttons
[ 7 ] and [ 8 ])
Press the desired input button (
Press the desired output button(s) (
Press the Enter button.
1
)
2
)
•
Indicate that a potential tie has been created but not saved.
•
Indicate that a global preset has been selected to be saved or recalled but
that the preset action has not been accomplished.
❏
In the I/O Group mode, select group 1. See “I/O grouping” on page 3-21.
❏
In the I/O Group mode, indicate that group 1 is selected. See “I/O
grouping” on page 3-21.
❏
With the Preset, View, and Esc buttons, select Serial Port Configuration
mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate”
on page 3-51.
❏
Select 9600 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port
Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol
and baud rate” on page 3-51.
❏
Indicate that the rear panel Remote port is set to 9600 baud in Serial Port
Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol
and baud rate” on page 3-51.
❏
With the RGBHV/Video and Audio buttons, select front panel security
lockout mode 2 or toggle between mode 0 (unlocked) and mode 2. See
“Setting the front panel locks (Executive modes)” on page 3-48.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-5
Operation, cont’d
4
5
Preset button — The Preset button has two primary functions (•) and five
secondary (❏) functions:
•
Activates Save Preset mode to save a configuration as a preset and Recall
Preset mode to activate a previously-defined preset.
•
Blinks when Save Preset mode is active and lights steadily when Recall
Preset mode is active.
❏
In the I/O Group mode, select group 2. See “I/O grouping” on page 3-21.
❏
In the I/O Group mode, indicate that group 2 is selected. See “I/O
grouping” on page 3-21.
❏
With the Enter, View, and Esc buttons, select Serial Port Configuration
mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate”
on page 3-51.
❏
Select 19200 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port
Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol
and baud rate” on page 3-51.
❏
Indicate that the rear panel Remote port is set to 19200 baud in Serial Port
Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol
and baud rate” on page 3-51.
View ( ) button — The View (
eight secondary (❏) functions:
•
) button has two primary functions (•) and
Select View-Only mode that displays the current configuration.
View-only mode also provides a way to mute and unmute the
outputs. See “Muting and unmuting video and/or audio outputs”
on page 3-32.
3-6
•
Indicate that View-Only mode is active.
❏
In the I/O Group mode, select group 3. See “I/O grouping” on page 3-21.
❏
In the I/O Group mode, indicate that group 3 is selected. See “I/O
grouping” on page 3-21.
❏
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) Decrease the RGB delay of switches to
the selected output. See “Setting RGB delay (CrossPoint 450 Plus
Switchers)” on page 3-26.
❏
(Audio models) Decrease the audio level of the selected input. See
“Viewing and adjusting the input audio level (audio models)” on
page 3-35.
❏
(Audio models) Decrease the volume of the selected output. See
“Viewing and adjusting the output volume (audio models)” on page 3-41.
❏
With the Enter, Preset, and Esc buttons, select Serial Port Configuration
mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate”
on page 3-51.
❏
Select 38400 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port
Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol
and baud rate” on page 3-51.
❏
Indicate that the rear panel Remote port is set to 38400 baud in Serial Port
Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol
and baud rate” on page 3-51.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
6
Esc ( ) button — The Esc ( ) button has two primary functions (•) and
eight secondary (❏) functions:
•
Cancel operations or selections in progress and reset the front panel
button indicators.
The Esc ( ) button does not reset the current configuration, the RGBHV
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers) button and
Audio selection button, any presets, or any audio gain or attenuation or
volume settings.
•
Flashes once to indicate that the escape function has been activated.
❏
In the I/O Group mode, select group 4. See “I/O grouping” on page 3-21.
❏
In the I/O Group mode, indicate that group 4 is selected. See “I/O
grouping” on page 3-21.
❏
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) Increase the RGB delay of switches to
the selected output. See “Setting RGB delay (CrossPoint 450 Plus
Switchers)” on page 3-26.
❏
(Audio models) Increase the audio level of the selected input. See
“Viewing and adjusting the input audio level (audio models)” on
page 3-35.
❏
(Audio models) Increase the volume of the selected output. See
“Viewing and adjusting the output volume (audio models)” on page 3-41.
❏
With the Enter, Preset, and View buttons, select Serial Port Configuration
mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate”
on page 3-51.
❏
Select 115200 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port
Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol
and baud rate” on page 3-51.
❏
Indicate that the rear panel Remote port is set to 115200 baud in Serial
Port Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port
protocol and baud rate” on page 3-51.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-7
Operation, cont’d
I/O controls
You must specify video, audio, or both when you are creating or viewing a
configuration. This is done with the RGBHV button (CrossPoint 450 Plus
switchers) or Video button (MAV Plus switchers) ( 7 ) and Audio ( 8 ) buttons.
Throughout this chapter, the terms “RGBHV button” and “Video button” can
be used interchangeably.
7
8
3-8
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus) button or Video (MAV Plus) button — The
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers)
button has two primary functions (•) and five secondary (❏) functions:
•
Selects and deselects video for a configuration that is being created or
viewed.
•
Lights green to indicate that video is available for configuring or for
viewing.
❏
With the Enter and Audio buttons, select among the front panel lock
modes. See “Setting the front panel locks (Executive modes)” on
page 3-48.
❏
With the Audio button, commands the front panel system reset. See
“Performing a system reset from the front panel” on page 3-50.
❏
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) Selects the RGB delay mode, in which
you can set the RGB delay. See “Setting RGB delay (CrossPoint 450 Plus
Switchers only)” on page 3-26.
❏
Select the RS-232 protocol for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port
Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol
and baud rate” on page 3-51.
❏
Indicate that the rear panel Remote port is set to the RS-232 protocol in
Serial Port Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port
protocol and baud rate” on page 3-51.
Audio button — The Audio button has two primary functions (•) and three
secondary (❏) functions
•
(Audio models only) Selects and deselects audio for a configuration that
is being created or viewed.
•
(Audio models only) Lights to indicate that audio is available for
configuration or viewing.
❏
(Audio models only) Selects the Audio mode, in which you can adjust
the input audio level and the output audio volume. See “Viewing and
adjusting the input audio level (audio models)” on page 3-35 and
“Viewing and adjusting the output volume (audio models)” on page 3-41.
❏
With the Enter and RGBHV/Video buttons, select among the front panel
lock modes. See “Setting the front panel locks (Executive modes)” on
page 3-48.
❏
With the RGBHV/Video button, commands the front panel system reset.
See “Performing a system reset from the front panel” on page 3-50.
❏
Select the RS-422 protocol for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port
Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol
and baud rate” on page 3-51.
❏
Indicate that the rear panel Remote port is set to the RS-422 protocol in
Serial Port Configuration mode. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port
protocol and baud rate” on page 3-51.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Power indicators (2412 and larger models only)
9
Primary and Redundant Power Supply LEDs —
Green — Indicates that the associated power supply is operating within
normal tolerances.
Red — Indicates that the associated power supply is operating outside the
normal tolerances or has failed.
Button icons
The numbered translucent covers on the input and output pushbuttons can be
removed and replaced to insert labels behind the covers.
Input and output labels can be created easily with Extron’s Button-Label Generator
software, which ships with every Extron matrix switcher. Each input and output
can be labeled with names, alphanumeric characters, or even color bitmaps for easy
and intuitive input and output selection (figure 3-4). See chapter 5, “Matrix
Software”, for details on using the labeling software. See Appendix B, “Reference
Information”, for blank labels and a procedure for removing and replacing the
translucent covers.
VTG 400
VIDEO & AUDIO TEST GENERATOR
10
VCR
DVD
Document
Camera
Computer
13
Computer
15
AUDIO
VIDEO
SIGNAL
TYPE
TEST
PATTERN
LEVEL
MENU
NEXT
QUICK
SELECT
SCOPE -TRIGGER
RANGE
1
FREQUENCY
RATE
2
3
CURSOR
POWER
4
SHAPE
HIDE
SELECT
VTG 400
28 29 30 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
Figure 3-4 — Sample button icons
Front Panel Operations
The following paragraphs detail the power-up process and then provide sample
procedures for creating ties; changing a configuration; viewing configurations;
saving and recalling a preset; muting and unmuting outputs, viewing and
adjusting the audio level; viewing and adjusting the output volume; locking out the
front panel; performing one of several resets; toggling background illumination on
and off; and reading and setting the rear panel Remote port settings.
Front panel security lockouts
In the procedural descriptions that follow, it is assumed that the switcher is in Lock
mode 0 (fully unlocked). The following two Lock modes are also available:
•
Lock mode 1 — All changes are locked from the front panel (except for
setting Lock mode 2). Some functions can be viewed.
•
Lock mode 2 — Advanced features are locked and can be viewed only. Basic
functions are unlocked.
See “Setting the front panel locks (Executive modes)” on page 3-48 for a detailed list
of basic and advanced functions and the procedure to set the various front panel
locks.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-9
Operation, cont’d
Power
Apply power by connecting the power cord to an AC source. The switcher
performs a self-test that flashes the front panel button indicators green, red, and
amber and then turns them off. (The order in which the colors are displayed
depends on the model.) An error-free power up self-test sequence leaves all I/O
and control buttons either unlit or showing background illumination. The lit/unlit
status of the RGBHV or Video button and the Audio button is defined by the
system configuration as follows:
• Systems with audio — RGBHV/Video and Audio both lit
• Systems without audio — RGBHV/Video lit and Audio unlit
The current configuration and all presets are saved in non-volatile memory. When
power is applied, the most recent configuration is retrieved. The previous presets
remain intact.
If an error occurs during the self-test, the switcher locks up and does not operate.
If your switcher locks up on power-up, call the Extron S3 Sales & Technical Support
Hotline.
Creating a configuration
The current configuration can be changed using the front panel buttons. Change
the current configuration as follows:
1.
Press the Esc button to clear any input button indicators, output button
indicators, or control button indicators that may be lit.
2.
Select to configure video, audio, or both by pressing the RGBHV
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers) button and/or
Audio button.
3.
Select the desired input and output(s) by pressing the input and output
buttons.
Input buttons light amber (matrix sizes up to 1616) or green (matrix sizes
above 1616). Output buttons light or blink amber to indicate video and audio
ties, green to indicate video only ties, and red to indicate audio only ties.
To indicate potential ties, output buttons blink the appropriate color when an
input is selected.
To indicate current ties, output buttons light steadily the appropriate color
when an input is selected.
To clear unwanted outputs, press and release the associated lit output
buttons. To indicate potential unties, output buttons blink the appropriate
color when an output is deselected but not untied from the input.
3-10
4.
Press and release the Enter button to accept the tie.
5.
Repeat steps 1 through 4 to create additional ties until the desired
configuration is complete.
•
Only one video input and one audio input can be tied to an output.
•
If a tie is made between an input and an output, and the selected output
was previously tied to another input, the older tie is broken in favor of the
newer tie.
•
If an input with no tie is selected, only that input’s button lights.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
•
When the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus
switchers) button and Audio button are lit, if an input with an audio tie
but no video tie is selected, the input’s button lights amber (matrix sizes
up to 1616) or green (matrix sizes 3232 and above) and the output button
lights the appropriate color (amber, green, or red).
•
As each input and output is selected, the associated output button blinks
the appropriate color to indicate a tentative tie. Buttons for output(s) that
were already tied to the input light the appropriate color steadily.
Outputs that are already tied can be left on, along with new blinking
selections, or toggled off by pressing the associated output button.
•
If you press the input button for an I/O grouped input and then try to
select an output in a different group, the associated output button cannot
be selected. The associated input button remains lit.
Example 1: Creating a set of video and audio ties
In the following example, input 5 is tied to outputs 3, 4, and 8. The steps show the
front panel indications that result from your action.
This example assumes that there are no ties in the current configuration.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-5).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-5 — Clear all selections
2.
To select video and audio for the tie, if necessary, press and release the
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers)
button and the Audio button until the buttons light (figure 3-6).
I/O
RGBHV AUDIO
Press the RGBHV/Video button to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.
The button lights green when selected. The button lights red when selected.
Figure 3-6 — Select RGBHV or video and audio
3.
Press and release the input 5 button (figure 3-7).
Press and release the Input 5 button.
The button lights amber (matrix sizes up to 1616) or
green (matrix sizes 2412 through 3232).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
Figure 3-7 — Select an input
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-11
Operation, cont’d
4.
Press and release the output 3, output 4, and output 8 buttons (figure 3-8).
The entire set of ties can be canceled at this point by pressing and releasing the
Esc button. The Esc button flashes green (matrix sizes up to 1616) or red
(matrix sizes 3232 and above) once.
Press and release the Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8 buttons.
The buttons blink amber to indicate that the selected RGBHV or video and audio
input will be tied to these outputs.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
The Enter button blinks
green to indicate the need to
confirm the change.
Figure 3-8 — Select the outputs
5.
Press and release the Enter button (figure 3-9).
Press the Enter button to
confirm the configuration
change.
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
ENTER
The Enter button returns to
unlit or background
illumination.
Figure 3-9 — Press the Enter button
The current configuration (figure 3-10) is now:
•
Input 5 video and audio tied to output 3, output 4, and output 8
Input 5 (video/audio) tied
to outputs 3, 4, and 8.
Input
5
3
4
8
Output
Video
Audio
Figure 3-10 — Example 1, final configuration
3-12
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
ESC
Example 2: Adding a tie to a set of video and audio ties
In the following example, a new video tie is added to the current configuration.
The steps show the front panel indications that result from your action.
This example assumes that you have performed example 1.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-11).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-11 — Clear all selections
2.
To select video only for the tie, if necessary, press and release the RGBHV
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers) button and the
Audio button (figure 3-12).
I/O
VIDEO
AUDIO
Press the RGBHV/Video button to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.
The button lights green when selected. The button is unlit or background illuminated when deselected.
Figure 3-12 — Select RGBHV or video only
3.
Press and release the input 5 button (figure 3-13).
Press and release the Input 5 button.
The button lights green to indicate that video
outputs can be tied to or untied from this input.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
The Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8 buttons light green to
indicate the RGBHV or video ties created in example 1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
Figure 3-13 — Select an input
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-13
Operation, cont’d
4.
Press and release the output 1 button (figure 3-14).
Press and release the Output 1 button.
The button blinks green to indicate that only the selected RGBHV
or video input will be tied to this output.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
Press and release the Enter button (figure 3-15).
Press the Enter button to
confirm the configuration
change.
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
ENTER
The Enter button returns to
unlit or background
illumination.
Figure 3-15 — Press the Enter button
The current configuration (figure 3-16) is now:
•
•
Input 5 video tied to output 1, output 3, output 4, and output 8
Input 5 audio tied to output 3, output 4, and output 8
Input 5 video tied
to outputs 1, 3, 4, and 8.
Input 5 audio tied
to outputs 3, 4, and 8.
Input
5
1
3
4
8
Output
Video
Audio
Figure 3-16 — Example 2, final configuration
3-14
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
ESC
The Enter button blinks
green to indicate the need to
confirm the change.
Figure 3-14 — Select the output
5.
VIEW
Example 3: Removing a tie from a set of video and audio ties
In the following example, an existing audio tie is removed from the current
configuration. The steps show the front panel indications that result from your
action.
This example assumes that you have performed example 1 and example 2.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-17).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-17 — Clear all selections
2.
To select audio only for the tie, if necessary, press and release the RGBHV
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers) button and the
Audio button (figure 3-18).
I/O
RGBHV AUDIO
Press the RGBHV/Videobutton to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.
The button is unlit or background illuminated The button lights red when selected.
when deselected.
Figure 3-18 — Select audio only
3.
Press and release the input 5 button (figure 3-19).
Press and release the Input 5 button.
The button lights red (matrix sizes up to 1616)
or green (matrix sizes 2412 through 3232).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
The Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8 buttons light red to
indicate the audio ties created in example 1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
The Output 1 button does not light to indicate the tie created
in example 2 because that tie is RGBHV or video only.
Figure 3-19 — Select an input
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-15
Operation, cont’d
4.
Press and release the output 4 button (figure 3-20).
C O NT R O L
Press and release the Output 4 button.
The button blinks red to indicate the pending change:
audio input will be untied.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
ENTER PRESET
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
VIEW
ESC
The Enter button blinks
green to indicate the need to
confirm the change.
Figure 3-20 — Deselect the output
5.
Press and release the Enter button (figure 3-21).
Press the Enter button to
confirm the configuration
change.
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
ENTER
The Enter button returns to
unlit or background
illumination.
Figure 3-21 — Press the Enter button
The current configuration (figure 3-22) is now:
•
•
Video —
(Video only models) — Input 5 tied to output 1, output 3, output 4, and
output 8
(Video and audio models) — Input 5 video tied to output 1, output 3,
output 4, and output 8
Audio — (audio models) Input 5 audio tied to output 3 and output 8
Input 5 video tied
to outputs 1, 3, 4, and 8.
Input 5 audio tied
to outputs 3 and 8.
Input
5
1
3
4
8
Output
Video
Audio
Figure 3-22 — Example 3, final configuration, audio switcher
3-16
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Viewing a configuration
The current configuration can be viewed using the front panel buttons. The ViewOnly mode prevents inadvertent changes to the current configuration. View-Only
mode also provides a way to mute video and audio outputs (see “Muting and
unmuting video and/or audio outputs” on page 3-32.
View the current configuration as follows:
1.
Press the Esc button to clear any input button indications, output button
indications, or control button indications that may be on.
2.
Press and release the View button. All of the buttons for outputs that are not
tied light:
•
•
•
Amber: No tied video or audio input
Green: No tied video input
Red: No tied audio input
3.
Select video, audio, or both to view by pressing the RGBHV
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers) button and/or
the Audio button.
4.
Select the desired input or output(s) whose ties you wish to view by pressing
the input and output buttons.
•
When you enter View-Only mode, the output buttons light for all
outputs without ties. Likewise, when an output button for which there are
no ties is pushed, the output buttons turn on for all outputs without ties.
•
To see all ties of the current configuration, press and release each input
and output button, one at a time, with the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus
switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers) button and the Audio button
lit.
•
In View-Only mode, you can view video and audio, video-only, or audioonly ties. Pressing and releasing the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus
switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers) button and the Audio button
toggles each on and off.
•
When you view video and audio ties, the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus
switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers) button is lit green and the
Audio button is lit red. After you select an input or output, the output
buttons light different colors to show where video and audio ties are not
the same (audio is broken away). Amber = video and audio, green = video
only, and red = audio only.
•
After 30 seconds of front panel inactivity, View-Only mode automatically
deselects.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-17
Operation, cont’d
Example 4: Viewing video and audio, audio only, and video only ties
In the following example, we view the video and audio, audio-only, and video-only
ties in the current configuration. The steps show the front panel indications that
result from your action.
This example assumes that you have performed example 1, example 2, and
example 3.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-23).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-23 — Clear all selections
2.
Press and release the View button to enter View-Only mode. The View button
lights red.
3.
To select both video and audio for viewing, if necessary, press and release the
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers)
button and the Audio button (figure 3-24).
Press the RGBHV/ Video
button to toggle on and off.
VIDEO
The button lights green
when selected.
Press the Audio button
to toggle on and off.
I/O
AUDIO
The button lights red
when selected.
Until you select an input, the buttons for all untied
outputs light amber if no inputs are tied, green if
no video inputs are tied (only audio is tied), or
red if no audio inputs are tied (only video is tied).
Red Amber Unlit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
Figure 3-24 — Select RGBHV or video and audio
3-18
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
Press and release the input 5 button (figure 3-25).
4.
Press and release the Input 5 button.
The button lights amber (matrix sizes up to 1616) or
green (matrix sizes 2412 through 3232.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to Input 5 light
the appropriate color:
Amber for audio and RGBHV or video ties (audio follow)
Green for RGBHV or video ties (audio breakaway)
Red for audio ties (audio breakaway)
Green
1
Amber Green
2
3
4
Amber
5
6
7
8 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to Input 5 are
either unlit or background illuminated.
Figure 3-25 — Select an input
A set of ties can also be viewed by selecting a tied output. To demonstrate this,
note the number of a lit output button, and then press and release the output
button for an untied (unlit or background illumination) output. Observe that
all of the untied outputs light. Then press the output button that you noted
previously and observe that the selected output button, the tied input button
(input 5), and the output buttons light for all of the outputs that are tied to the
input.
5.
Press and release the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video
(MAV Plus switchers) button to deselect RGBHV or video (figure 3-26).
Press the RGBHV/ Video
button to deselect it.
The button is unlit or
background illuminated
when deselected.
I/O
VIDEO
AUDIO
The Audio button
remains lit red to
indicate that only
audio is selected.
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to Input 5 light red
to indicate audio ties (audio breakaway).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to Input 5 are
either unlit or background illuminated.
Figure 3-26 — Deselect RGBHV or video to view audio ties only
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-19
Operation, cont’d
6.
Press and release the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video
(MAV Plus switchers) button and the Audio button to toggle the RGBHV or
Video button on green and the Audio button either unlit or providing
background illumination (figure 3-27).
Press the RGBHV/
Video button to select it.
The button lights green
when selected.
Press the Audio
button to deselect it.
I/O
VIDEO
The button is unlit
or background
illuminated when
deselected.
AUDIO
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to Input 5 light
green to indicate RGBHV/Video ties (audio breakaway).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to Input 5 are
either unlit or background illuminated.
Figure 3-27 — Deselect audio and select RGBHV or video to view RGBHV
or video only
If video ties are established for input 5, the output buttons for all video
outputs tied to input 5 light green. If no ties are established for input 5, all
output buttons return to either unlit or to background illumination.
7.
Press and release the View button to exit View-Only mode (figure 3-28).
Press the View button
to exit View-Only mode.
VIEW
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
The View button returns to
unlit or background
illumination.
Figure 3-28 — Press the View button to exit View-Only mode
3-20
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
I/O grouping
I/O grouping is a matrix switcher feature that allows you to subdivide the front
panel control of the matrix into four smaller functional sub-switchers and limit tie
creation from the front panel only. Inputs and outputs can be assigned to one of
four groups or not assigned to any group.
Inputs and outputs that are assigned to a group can only be tied to other outputs
and inputs within the same group when you are creating ties on the front panel.
For example, a front panel operator cannot tie an input that is assigned to group 1
to an output that is assigned to group 2. Ungrouped inputs and outputs can be
switched to outputs and inputs in any group. Ties between groups (an input in
group 1 tied to an output in group 2) can be created under serial port or Ethernet
control.
Suggested applications for the I/O grouping feature include:
1
2
•
Segregating specific video formats to prevent an input in one video format
from being inadvertently applied to an output device that supports another
video format (figure 3-29).
•
Segregating input and output devices that are in separate rooms.
•
Isolating video from being displayed on specific output devices for
operational security reasons.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
VSC 700
SCAN CONVERTER
FREEZE
IR
MENU
RESET
NEXT
SIZE
MIN/MAX
CENTER/PAN/SIZE
Computer #1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10
VSC 700
3 input, 4 output
RGBHV matrix
Input
24 25 26
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
Computer #3
Projector
5
6 Output
7
8
Group 3
Monitor
3 input, 2 output
S-video matrix
4 input, 2 output
composite video matrix
INPUTS
FREEZE
RGB
FREEZE
1
UNIVERSAL COMPOSITE
2
3
PICTURE ADJUSTMENTS
S-VIDEO
SDI
4
5
CENTER
SIZE
BRT/CONT
COL/TNT
ADJUST
ZOOM
DETAIL
MENU
NEXT
USP 405
UNIVERSAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR
Camera #1
Document Camera
Input
17 18 19 20
1
2 Output
Monitor
VCR
USP 405
Input
21 22 23
3
Output
4
Group 2
Group 1
Camera #4
Monitor
Monitor
DVD
Figure 3-29 — I/O grouping of incompatible video formats
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-21
Operation, cont’d
The I/O groups can be set up on the front panel or by using serial port and
Ethernet ports and either the SIS or the Windows control program (see chapter 4,
“Programmer’s Guide”, and chapter 5, “Matrix Software”. Create I/O groups on
the front panel as follows:
I/O groups are protected when front panel lock mode 2 is selected. You can
view the groups in lock mode 2, but not change them from the front panel.
1.
Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control
buttons that may be lit.
2.
To enter I/O Group mode, press and hold the Input 1 and Output 1 buttons
until the input and output buttons light to display the ungrouped inputs and
outputs.
3.
Press and release one of the Control buttons to select a group:
•
Press the Enter button to select group 1.
•
Press the Preset button to select group 2.
•
Press the View button to select group 3.
•
Press the Esc button to select group 4.
4.
Select the desired input(s) and output(s) to assign to the group by pressing the
input and output buttons.
5.
Press and release the RGBHV/Video and Audio button to exit the I/O Group
mode, or allow the mode to time out after approximately 30 seconds.
•
Ties between groups (an input in group 1 tied to an output in group 2)
can be created under serial port or Ethernet control.
•
Presets can be created under serial port or Ethernet control that tie inputs
and outputs across group boundaries. These presets are selectable from
the front panel.
•
An input or output can be assigned to only one group. If you assign an
input or output to a group and that input or output is already assigned to
a different group, the older grouping is discarded in favor of the new
grouping.
•
Audio can be broken away from the video for a given input or output
(assigned to different groups) by isolating only video or only audio using
the front panel RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus)/Video (MAV Plus) and/or
Audio buttons after you select I/O Group mode (between steps 2 and 3).
Audio breakaway across different groups can be confusing when
operating the front panel; is not displayed by the Matrix Switchers
Control Program, HTML pages, or SIS commands; and is not
recommended.
•
3-22
For I/O groups to have any function, at least two groups must be created.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Example 5: Grouping inputs and outputs
In the following example, several switcher inputs and outputs are assigned to
groups. The steps show the front panel indications that result from your action.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-30).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-30 — Clear all selections
2.
To enter I/O Group mode, press and hold the Input 1 and Output 1 buttons
(figure 3-31).
Release the Input 1 button
and Output 1 button.
• Ungrouped input and
output buttons light.
1
Press and hold
the Input 1 button
and Output 1 button.
2
5 16
17 18 11 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
1
2 seconds
1
2
5 16
17 18 11 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
2
5 16
17 18 11 32
1
2
5 16
17 18 11 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
Figure 3-31 — Select I/O Group mode
3.
Press and release the Enter button to select group 1 (figure 3-32).
Press and release the Enter button to select group 1.
The button lights amber to indicate the selection.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
Group # 1
2
VIEW
ESC
3
4
Figure 3-32 — Select an I/O group
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-23
Operation, cont’d
I/O groups are protected when front panel lock mode 2 is selected. You can
view the groups in lock mode 2, but not change them from the front panel.
If front panel lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform steps 4 through 6,
the actions are ignored and the Enter, RGBHV/Video, and Audio buttons flash.
4.
Press and release the input 1 through 4 and output 1 through 4 buttons
(figure 3-33).
Press and release the Input 1 through Input 4 buttons.
The selected buttons light green.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
Press and release the Output 1 through Output 4 buttons.
The selected buttons light green.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
Figure 3-33 — Assign inputs and outputs
5.
Press and release the Preset button to select group 2 (figure 3-34).
Press and release the Preset button to select group 2.
The button lights amber to indicate the selection.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
Group # 1
2
VIEW
ESC
3
4
Figure 3-34 — Select an I/O group
3-24
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
6.
Press and release the input 5 through 8 and output 5 through 8 buttons
(figure 3-35).
Press and release the Input 5 through Input 8 buttons.
The selected buttons light.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
Press and release the Output 5 through Output 8 buttons.
The selected buttons light.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
Figure 3-35 — Assign inputs and outputs
7.
Press and release the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV
Plus switchers) button and the Audio button until the buttons light
(figure 3-36). The switcher exits I/O Group mode.
I/O
RGBHV AUDIO
Press and release both buttons.
Figure 3-36 — Exit I/O Group mode
As an alternative, do nothing for approximately 30 seconds. The front panel
times out and the switcher exits I/O Group mode.
•
Group 1 consists of inputs 1 through 4 and outputs 1 through 4.
•
Group 2 consists of inputs 5 through 8 and outputs 5 through 8.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-25
Operation, cont’d
Setting RGB delay (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only)
The CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers can briefly blank the RGB (video) output while it
switches to the new input’s sync source, and then switches the RGB signals. This
allows a brief delay for the display to adjust to the selected input’s sync timing
before displaying the new picture, which will appear without glitches. RGB delay,
also known as Triple-Action Switching or video mute switching, is user selectable
from 0 to 5 seconds, in half-second increments.
The RGB delay interval can be set on the front panel or by using either serial port or
the Ethernet port and either the SIS, Windows control program, or HTML pages
(see chapter 4, “Programmer’s Guide”, chapter 5, “Matrix Software”, and chapter 6,
“HTML operation”. Specify the RGB delay interval for a specific output on the
front panel as follows:
RGB delay is protected when front panel lock mode 2 is selected. You can
view the delay in lock mode 2, but not change it from the front panel.
1.
Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control
buttons that may be lit.
2.
To enter RGB Delay mode, press and hold the RGBHV button until the button
begins to blink green, then release the button.
3.
Press and release an output button to select an output. Each lit input button,
from Input 1 through Input 10, indicates a half second of RGB delay interval
for the selected output.
4.
Press and release the Esc (
the interval.
5.
Press and release the RGBHV button to exit the RGB Delay mode. The
RGBHV button stops blinking.
) and View (
) buttons to increase and decrease
•
Pressing the Enter or Preset button also exits RGB Delay mode. Pressing
the Preset button changes to Recall Preset mode.
•
The RGB interval for each output is stored in non-volatile memory. When
power is removed and restored, the delay settings are retained.
•
Exiting RGB Delay mode by pressing the RGBHV button always returns
the I/O configuration to audio only selected for configuration.
Example 6: Setting the RGB delay for an output
In the following example, the RGB delay is increased for output 17. The steps show
the front panel indications that result from your action.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-37).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-37 — Clear all selections
3-26
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
2.
Press and hold the RGBHV button for approximately 2 seconds (figure 3-38).
Press and hold the RGBHV
button until it blinks.
RGBHV
RGBHV
2 seconds
Figure 3-38 — Select RGB Delay mode
3.
Press and release the output 17 button (figure 3-39).
The input buttons 1 through 10 display the selected
output's RGB delay.
Each lit input button indicates half a second of delay.
In this example, the green input buttons display 3.5
seconds of RGB delay.
1
Press and release the
Output 17 button.
The button lights green.
2
5 16
17 18 11 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
= Unlit button
I
N
P
U
T
S
= Lit green button
Figure 3-39 — Select an output
The RGB delay is protected when front panel lock mode 2 is selected. You can
view the delay in lock mode 2, but not change it from the front panel.
If front panel lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform steps 4, the
actions are ignored and the Enter, RGBHV/Video, and Audio buttons flash.
4.
Press and release the Esc (
delay by a half second.
) button once (figure 3-40) to increase the RGB
Press and release the Esc ( ) button twice more to increase the RGB delay by
a whole second. Note the input button indication changes that occur each
time the Esc ( ) button is pressed and released.
) button a total of 3 times.
Figure 3-40 show the result of pressing the Esc (
Press the Esc button to increase
the RGB interval that is applied to
switches to the selected output by
a half second per button push.
ESC
ESC
Input buttons 1 through 10 display the selected output's RGB delay.
Each lit input button indicates half a second of delay.
In this example, the green input buttons display 5.0 seconds of RGB interval.
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 16
ESC
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 32
= Unlit button
I
N
P
U
T
S
= Lit green button
Figure 3-40 — Adjust the RGB delay interval
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-27
Operation, cont’d
5.
Press and release the RGBHV button (figure 3-41).
Press the RGBHV button
to exit RGB delay mode.
I/O
The RGBHV button stops blinking
and goes out or becomes
background illuminated.
RGBHV AUDIO
The Audio button lights red.
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
Figure 3-41 — Deselect RGB Delay mode
Using presets
The current configuration (configuration 0) can be saved as a preset in any one of
32 preset memory addresses. Preset locations are assigned to the input buttons
and (where necessary) output buttons. Up to 20 or 32 (depending on the number
of input and output buttons) presets can be selected from the front panel to be
either saved or retrieved. When a preset is retrieved from memory, it becomes the
current configuration.
3-28
•
Only the audio and video ties are stored and recalled; audio gain settings
are not saved, and they do not change when a preset is recalled.
•
Presets cannot be viewed from the front panel unless recalled as the
current configuration. Presets can be viewed using Extron’s Windowsbased control program. See Chapter 5, “Matrix Software”, for more
details.
•
The current configuration and all presets are stored in non-volatile
memory. When power is removed and restored, the current configuration
is still active and all presets are retained.
•
When a preset is recalled, it replaces the current configuration, which is
lost unless it is also stored as a preset. The recalled preset overwrites all of
the current configuration ties in favor of the preset configuration ties.
•
All models have 32 presets; on models with fewer than 32 input and
output buttons, preset numbers that are too high to be available from the
front panel are still accessible under serial port or Ethernet control.
•
Figure 3-42 on the next page shows the presets associated with the various
input and output buttons for all three front panel configurations.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
24 x 12, 24 x 24, 32 x 16, and 32 x 32 matrix sizes
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Input
buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset
18
19
20
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
17
21
22
8 x 16, 16 x 4, 16 x 8, 12 x 12, and 16 x 16 matrix sizes
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
INPUTS
Input
buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Output
buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUTPUTS
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
8 x 4, 8 x 8, 12 x 4, and 12 x 8 matrix sizes
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INPUTS
Input
buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Output
buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
NOTE Presets 21 through 32 are available via RS-232/
RS-422 and Ethernet control only
OUTPUTS
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Figure 3-42 — Preset locations by matrix sizes
Example 7: Saving a preset
The following steps show an example in which the current configuration is saved
as a preset. The steps show the front panel indications that result from your action.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-43).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-43 — Clear all selections
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-29
Operation, cont’d
2.
Press and hold the Preset button for approximately 2 seconds until it blinks
(figure 3-44).
Red
(Preset Assigned)
Press and hold the Preset button until it blinks.
PRESET
1
2
3
4 15 16
PRESET
2 seconds
All input buttons with assigned
presets light red.
If you then save the configuration
to a lit preset number, the configuration
data at that preset location
will be overwritten.
17 18 19 20 31 32
Unlit
(No Preset Assigned)
Figure 3-44 — Enter Save Preset mode
3.
Press and release the input or output button for the desired preset
(figure 3-45).
C O NT R O L
Press and release the Input 1 button.
•
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button blinks red to indicate that this preset
number is selected but not saved.
• The Enter button blinks to
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
indicate the need to save
the preset.
• The Preset button
continues to blink.
Figure 3-45 — Select the preset
Figure 3-42 on page 3-29 shows the presets associated with the various input
and output buttons for all three front panel configurations.
4.
Press and release the Enter button (figure 3-46). The current configuration is
now stored in the selected memory location.
Press the Enter button to
save the preset.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
All input buttons return to unlit
or background illumination.
The Enter and Preset
buttons return to unlit or
background illumination.
Figure 3-46 — Press the Enter button
3-30
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
I
N
P
U
T
S
Example 8: Recalling a preset
The following steps show an example in which a preset is recalled to become the
current configuration. The steps show the front panel indications that result from
your action.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-47).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-47 — Clear all selections
2.
Press and release the Preset button (figure 3-48).
Red
(Preset Assigned)
Press and release the
Preset button.
The Preset button lights.
1
2
3 15 16
PRESET
All input buttons with
assigned presets light red.
17 18 19 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
Unlit
(No Preset Assigned)
Figure 3-48 — Enter Recall Preset mode
3.
Press and release the input or output button for the desired preset
(figure 3-49).
Press and release the Input 1 button.
The button blinks red to indicate that this
preset number is selected but not recalled.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
1
2
3
4 15 16
17 18 19 20 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
VIEW
ESC
The Enter button blinks
to indicate the need to
recall the preset.
= Blinking button
Figure 3-49 — Select the preset
Figure 3-42 on page 3-29 shows the presets associated with the various input
and output buttons for all three front panel configurations.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-31
Operation, cont’d
4.
Press and release the Enter button (figure 3-50). The configuration stored in
selected memory location is now the current configuration and can be viewed
in the View-Only mode (see example 4).
Press the Enter button to
recall the preset.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
1
The Enter and Preset
buttons return to unlit or
background illumination.
2
3
4 15 16
17 18 19 20 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
All input buttons return to unlit or background illumination.
Figure 3-50 — Press the Enter button
Muting and unmuting video and/or audio outputs
Individual outputs can be muted or unmuted as follows:
Mutes are protected when front panel lock mode 2 is selected. You can view
the status of the output (muted or unmuted) in lock mode 2, but not change it
from the front panel.
3-32
1.
Press the Esc button to clear any input button indications, output button
indications, or control button indications that may be on.
2.
Press and release the View button.
3.
Select video, audio, or both to mute or unmute by pressing the RGBHV
(CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus switchers) button and/or
the Audio button.
4.
One at a time, press and hold the output button(s) for the desired output(s)
for approximately 2 seconds. The output LED(s) for the selected output(s)
blink to indicate the mute or return to their previous state to indicate the
unmute.
5.
Press and release the View button to return to normal switcher operation.
•
You can mute video and audio, video-only, or audio-only outputs.
Pressing and releasing the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or
Video (MAV Plus switchers) button and the Audio button toggles each
selection on and off.
•
When you enter View-Only mode, the output LEDs turn on for all
outputs without ties.
•
On CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers, the video mute function mutes the
R, G, and B planes only; the H and V planes are still active. On
MAV Plus switchers, the video mute function mutes all video planes.
•
Mutes are saved to non-volatile memory. When power is removed and
restored, the mute settings are retained.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Example 9: Muting and unmuting an output
The following steps show an example in which several switcher outputs are muted
and unmuted. The steps show the front panel indications that result from your
action.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-51).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-51 — Clear all selections
2.
Press and release the View button to enter View-Only mode. The View button
lights red.
3.
To select both video and audio for viewing and muting, if necessary, press
and release the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or Video (MAV Plus
switchers) button and the Audio button (figure 3-52).
This example shows the front panel indications if example 1, example 2, and
example 3 have been completed.
Press the RGBHV/ Video
button to toggle on and off.
VIDEO
The button lights green
when selected.
Press the Audio button
to toggle on and off.
I/O
AUDIO
The button lights red
when selected.
Until you select an input, the buttons for all untied
outputs light amber if no inputs are tied, green if
no video inputs are tied (only audio is tied), or
red if no audio inputs are tied (only video is tied).
Red Amber Unlit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
Figure 3-52 — Select RGBHV or video and audio
Output mutes are protected when front panel lock mode 2 is selected. You can
view the mutes in lock mode 2, but not change them from the front panel.
If front panel lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform steps 4 and 5, the
actions are ignored.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-33
Operation, cont’d
4.
One at a time, press and hold the Output 3 and then the Output 4 buttons
(figure 3-53) for approximately 2 seconds until the buttons begin to blink. The
output 3 and output 4 video and audio signals are muted.
Mute outputs one at a time.
3
4
3
The button blinks amber to
indicate that the RGBHV or Video
and audio outputs are muted.
4
The button blinks amber to
indicate that the RGBHV or Video
and audio outputs are muted.
Press and hold the Output 3 button.
2 seconds
Press and hold the Output 4 button.
2 seconds
Figure 3-53 — Mute the outputs
If both RGBHV/video and audio are selected, the mute action toggles both the
video and audio outputs. If either the video output or the audio output is
already muted, the unmuted output is muted and the muted output is
unmuted.
If both RGBHV/video and audio are selected and only video is muted, the
output button flashes between green and amber. If only audio is selected, the
output button flashes between red and amber.
5.
One at a time, press and hold the Output 3 and then the Output 4 buttons
(figure 3-54) for approximately 2 seconds until the buttons lights steadily. The
output 3 and output 4 video and audio signals are unmuted.
Unmute outputs one at a time.
3
4
2 seconds
3
The button returns to its previous indication
(either lit green, background illuminated, or unlit)
to indicate that the outputs are unmuted.
Press and hold the Output 4 button.
2 seconds
4
The button returns to its previous indication
(either lit green, background illuminated, or unlit)
to indicate that the outputs are unmuted.
Press and hold the Output 3 button.
Figure 3-54 — Unmute the outputs
If both RGBHV/video and audio are selected, the unmute action toggles both
the video and audio outputs. If either the video output or the audio output is
already unmuted, the muted output is unmuted and the unmuted output is
muted.
6.
Press and release the View button to exit View-Only mode (figure 3-55).
Press the View button
to exit View-Only mode.
VIEW
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
The View button returns to
unlit or background
illumination.
Figure 3-55 — Press the View button to exit View-Only mode
3-34
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Viewing and adjusting the input audio level (audio models)
On models with audio, the audio level of each input can be displayed and adjusted
through a range of -18 dB to +24 dB to ensure that there is no noticeable volume
difference among sources (figure 3-56). The audio level can be adjusted from the
front panel or under serial port or Ethernet control. The default audio input level is
0 dB.
dBu
+24
+21
+19
+16
+13
+10
+7
+4
+1
-2
-5
-8
-12
-15
-18
VU
21
18
15
12
9
6
3
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-21
dBu
+24
+21
+19
+16
+13
+10
+7
+4
+1
-2
-5
-8
-12
-15
-18
VCR
Audio
Inputs
Low Audio
Output Level
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Output
Level
I
N
P
U
T
S
I/O
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
1
dBu
+24
+21
+19
+16
+13
+10
+7
+4
+1
-2
-5
-8
-12
-15
-18
VU
21
18
15
12
9
6
3
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-21
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
CROSSPOINT
Audio
Inputs
High Audio
Output Level
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
VU
21
18
15
12
9
6
3
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-21
VIEW
ESC
RGBHV AUDIO
POWER SUPPLY
Audio System
PRIMARY
REDUNDANT
PLUS SERIES SWITCHER WITH ADSP
Crosspoint 450 Plus 3232
No noticeable
volume differences
between sources
CD Jukebox
Figure 3-56 — Audio gain and attenuation
1.
Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control
buttons that may be lit.
2.
To enter Audio mode, press and hold the Audio button until the button begins
to blink red, then release the button.
3.
Press and release an input button to select an input. The output buttons
display audio level and polarity (+ or –) for the selected input. Each lit output
button indicates 1 dB of gain or attenuation. Green output buttons indicate a
gain (+) audio level and red buttons indicate an attenuation (–) level.
4.
Press and release the Esc (
the audio level.
5.
Press and release the Audio button to exit the Audio mode. The Audio button
stops blinking.
) and View (
) buttons to increase and decrease
•
Pressing the Enter or Preset button also exits Audio mode. Pressing the
Preset button changes to Recall Preset mode.
•
There is one audio level setting per input. The audio level setting is
shared by the left and right audio inputs.
•
The audio level settings are stored in non-volatile memory. When power
is removed and restored, the audio level settings are retained.
•
Exiting Audio mode by pressing the Audio button always returns the I/O
configuration to RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers) or video
(MAV Plus switchers) and audio selected for configuration.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-35
Operation, cont’d
Example 10: Viewing and adjusting an input audio level
The following steps show an example in which an audio level is viewed and
adjusted. The steps show the front panel indications that result from your action.
Audio gain and attenuation is displayed differently on different models.
•
Switchers with 32 output buttons — Each output button indicates 1 dB when
lit. See the table on page 3-37.
•
Switchers with 16 output buttons — Each output button indicates 1 dB when
blinking and 2 dB when lit. See the table on page 3-38.
•
Switchers with 8 output buttons — Each output button indicates 1 dB when
blinking slowly, 2 dB when blinking quickly, and 3 dB when lit. See the table
on page 3-38.
Because of the different gain and attenuation display schemes, the input audio
levels that result from the following example are shown three times: as displayed
on a 32-button switcher, on a 16-button switcher, and on an 8-button switcher. The
32-button displays show the actions that led up to the display. For simplicity, the
16-button and 8-button figures show the attenuation display only, not the actions
that lead up to it.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-57).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-57 — Clear all selections
2.
Press and hold the Audio button for approximately 2 seconds (figure 3-58).
AUDIO
Press and hold the Audio button until it blinks.
2 seconds
AUDIO
Figure 3-58 — Select Audio mode
3-36
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Input audio level adjustment displays
CrossPoint 450 Plus /
MAV Plus
2412, 2424, 3216, 3232 HVA
dB
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
dB
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
3
8
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
4
7
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
5
6
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
6
5
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
7
4
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
8
3
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
9
2
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
10
1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
11
CrossPoint 450 Plus /
MAV Plus
2412, 2424, 3216, 3232 HVA
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
= unlit button
= lit button
Green indicates a positive (gain) level,
red indicates a negative (attenuation) level
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-37
Operation, cont’d
Input audio level adjustment displays
dB
CrossPoint 450 Plus /
MAV Plus
84, 88, 124, 128 HVA
dB
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 F 23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 S 22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7F 8
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7S 8
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17
1
2
3
4
5
6F 7
8
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
16
1
2
3
4
5
6S 7
8
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
14
1
2
3
4
5F 6
7
8
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
13
1
2
3
4
5S 6
7
8
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11
1
2
3
4F 5
6
7
8
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
10
1
2
3
4S 5
6
7
8
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8
1
2
3F 4
5
6
7
8
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7
1
2
3S 4
5
6
7
8
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5
1
2F 3
4
5
6
7
8
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4
1
2S 3
4
5
6
7
8
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2
1F 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
1S 2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2
= Unlit button
S
CrossPoint 450 Plus /
MAV Plus
816, 164, 168, 1212, 1616 HVA
= Blinking button
= Slow blinking button
F
= Fast blinking button
= Lit button
Green indicates a positive (gain) level, red indicates a negative (attenuation) level
3-38
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3.
Press and release the input 5 button (figure 3-59).
Press and release the Input 5 button.
The button lights green.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
The output buttons display the selected input’s audio level
and polarity (gain or attenuation).
• Each output button indicates 1 dB when lit.
When the buttons are lit green, they indicate a gain (+)
audio level.
When the output buttons are lit red, they indicate an
attenuation (-) level.
• In this example, the output buttons display an audio
gain level of +8 dB.
Green
1
2
3
4
Unlit
5
6
7
8
5 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 21 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
Unlit
Figure 3-59 — Select an input
Figure 3-60 shows the same level (+8 dB) as in figure 3-59, but displayed on a
16-output-button switcher, such as a CrossPoint 450 Plus 816 HVA.
Green
1
Unlit
2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 15 16
OUTPUTS
In this example, the output buttons display an audio gain level of +8 dB.
Figure 3-60 — Level display on a 16-output-button switcher
Figure 3-61 shows the same level (+8 dB) as in figure 3-59, but displayed on a
8-output-button switcher, such as a MAV Plus 84 HDA.
Flashing fast
Green Green
1
2 3 4 5
Unlit
6 7 8
OUTPUTS
In this example, the output buttons
display an audio gain level of +8 dB.
Figure 3-61 — Level display on a 8-output-button switcher
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-39
Operation, cont’d
4.
Press and release the View (
audio level by 1 dB.
) button once (figure 3-62) to decrease the input
Press and release the View ( ) button several more times (figure 3-62) to
decrease the input audio level by 1 dB per button push. Note the output
button indication changes that occur each time the View ( ) button is pressed.
Figure 3-62 shows the result of pressing the View ( ) button a total of 9 times.
Note that the level is now displayed in red to indicate a negative level.
Press the View button to decrease the input
audio level by 1 dB per button push.
VIEW
Unlit
Red
• The output buttons display the selected input's
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
audio level and polarity (gain or attenuation).
• Each output button indicates 1 dB when lit.
When the buttons are lit green, they indicate a
gain (+) audio level.
When the output buttons are lit red, they
indicate an attenuation (-) level.
• In this example, the output buttons display an
audio attenuation level of -1 dB.
Unlit
Figure 3-62 — Adjust the input audio level
Figure 3-63 shows the same level (–1 dB) as in figure 3-62, but displayed on a
16-output-button switcher, such as a MAV Plus 1616 A.
Blinking
Red
1
Unlit
2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 15 16
OUTPUTS
In this example, the output buttons display an audio gain level of -1 dB.
Figure 3-63 — Level display on a 16-output-button switcher
Figure 3-64 shows the same level (–1 dB) as in figure 3-62, but displayed on a
8-output-button switcher, such as a CrossPoint 450 Plus 128 HVA.
Slowly
Blinking Red
Unlit
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8
OUTPUTS
In this example, the output buttons display an
audio gain level of +8 dB.
Figure 3-64 — Level display on a 8-output-button switcher
3-40
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
5.
Press and release the Audio button (figure 3-65).
Press the Audio button
to exit audio mode.
I/O
The RGBHV or Video
button lights green.
RGBHV AUDIO
The Audio button stops
blinking and lights.
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
Figure 3-65 — Deselect Audio mode
Viewing and adjusting the output volume (audio models)
On models with audio, the audio level of each output can be displayed and
adjusted through a range of 100% (no attenuation) to 0% (maximum [76 dB]
attenuation). The audio level can be adjusted from the front panel or under
serial port or Ethernet control. The default volume is 100% (no attenuation).
Output volume is protected when front panel lock mode 2 is selected. You can
view the volume in lock mode 2, but not adjust it from the front panel.
1.
Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control
buttons that may be lit.
2.
To enter Audio mode, press and hold the Audio button until the button begins
to blink red, then release the button.
3.
Press and release an output button to select an output. The input buttons
display the volume level for the selected output. The switchers indicate the
volume differently, depending on number of input buttons, but as a general
rule, the more buttons that are lit, the higher the volume. The fewer buttons
that are lit, the lower the volume.
For a more detailed analysis of decoding the displayed value, see “Reading
the displayed volume” on the next page.
4.
Press and release the Esc (
the audio volume.
5.
Press and release the Audio button to save the audio settings and exit the
Audio mode. The Audio button stops blinking.
) and View (
) buttons to increase and decrease
•
There is one audio volume level setting per output. The audio level setting
is shared by the left and right audio inputs.
•
The audio volume levels are stored in non-volatile memory. When power
is removed and restored, the audio level settings are retained.
•
Exiting Audio mode by pressing the Audio button always returns the I/O
buttons to RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus) or Video (MAV Plus) lit green
and Audio lit red.
•
Pressing the Enter or Preset button also exits Audio mode. Pressing the
Preset button changes to Recall Preset mode.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-41
Operation, cont’d
Reading the displayed volume
This section is a detailed look at reading the output volume display on the
switcher’s front panel. If you do not need to read the exact value of the volume
setting, skip this section.
There are 65 steps of volume attenuation, with 1 dB per step (button push), except
for 0-to-1, which is 13 dB. At maximum attenuation, no input buttons are lit, 76 dB
of attenuation is applied, and the audio output is effectively muted. At no
attenuation, all input buttons are lit and the output volume is equal to the input
signal plus any gain or attenuation that is applied to that specific input using the
input audio level adjustment. See “Viewing and adjusting the input audio level
(audio models)”. Other than the minimum and maximum volume, the switchers
indicate the volume differently, depending on number (12, 16, or 32) of input
buttons. See the table on the next page to read the volume display for each display
scheme.
For each display scheme, the input buttons blink or light sequentially to indicate
the approximate volume of the selected output. Volume is defined as a percentage
of the input audio signal that is applied to the output. From 0% of volume, the first
Esc ( ) button push applies 5.5% of the input audio signal. From 5.5% on, each
Esc ( ) push applies 1.5% more of the input audio signal to the output:
•
•
Push Esc (
Switchers with 12 and 16 input buttons — Indicated by the Input 1
button blinking slowly.
Switchers with 32 input buttons — Indicated by the Input 1 button lit
steadily.
Push Esc (
) button twice — 7% + 1.5% + 1.5% = 10% volume
Switchers with 12 input buttons — Indicated by the Input 1 button
blinking quickly.
Switchers with 16 input buttons — Indicated by the Input 1 button lit
steadily.
Switchers with 32 input buttons — Indicated by the Input 1 and Input 2
button lit steadily.
• Push Esc (
3-42
) button — 5.5% + 1.5% = 7% volume
) button nineteen times — 10% + (19•1.5%) = 38.5% volume
Switchers with 12 input buttons — Indicated by the Input 1 through 4
buttons lit steadily.
Switchers with 16 input buttons — Indicated by the Input 1 through 5
buttons lit steadily and the Input 6 button blinking.
Switchers with 32 input buttons — Indicated by the Input 1 through
Input 11 buttons lit steadily and the Input 12 button blinking.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Audio volume adjustment settings
Highest # input button lit
dB of
Output
Highest # input button lit
dB of
Output
12-input 16-input 32-input attenuation volume 12-input 16-input 32-input attenuation volume
switcher switcher switcher
switcher switcher switcher
None
1
1
Slow
blink
Fast
blink
None
1
1
1
2
Slow
blink
2
2
2
Fast
blink
3
2
3
Slow
blink
3
4
3
Fast
blink
4
3
4
Slow
blink
5
5
4
Fast
blink
6
4
5
Slow
blink
6
7
5
Fast
blink
7
5
6
6
Slow
blink
Fast
blink
8
8
None
76
0%
1
63
5.5%
1
62
7%
2
61
8.5%
2
60
10%
3
59
11.5%
3
58
13%
4
57
14.5%
4
56
16%
5
55
17.5%
5
54
19%
6
53
20.5%
6
52
22%
7
51
23.5%
7
50
25%
8
49
26.5%
8
48
28%
9
47
29.5%
9
46
31%
10
45
32.5%
10
44
34%
11
43
35.5%
11
42
37%
12
41
38.5%
12
40
40%
13
39
41.5%
13
38
43%
14
37
44.5%
14
36
46%
15
35
47.5%
15
34
49%
16
33
50.5%
16
32
52%
6
Fast
blink
6
7
7
9
Slow
blink
9
Fast
blink
10
7
8
8
9
9
Slow
blink
10
Fast
blink
11
8
11
Slow
blink
12
Fast
blink
12
9
10
10
Slow
blink
13
Fast
blink
13
10
11
11
Slow
blink
Fast
blink
14
14
15
11
12
12
Slow
blink
15
Fast
blink
16
12
16
17
31
53.5%
17
30
55%
18
29
56.5%
18
28
58%
19
27
59.5%
19
26
61%
20
25
62.5%
20
24
64%
21
23
65.5%
21
22
67%
22
21
68.5%
22
20
70%
23
19
71.5%
23
18
73%
24
17
74.5%
24
16
76%
25
15
77.5%
25
14
79%
26
13
80.5%
26
12
82%
27
11
83.5%
27
10
85%
28
9
86.5%
28
8
88%
29
7
89.5%
29
6
91%
30
5
92.5%
30
4
94%
31
3
95.5%
31
2
97%
32
1
98.5%
32
0
100%
= blinking LED
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-43
Operation, cont’d
When all input buttons are lit for any switcher model, the audio output is 100% of
the audio input level.
Another way to view the volume level is to think in terms of the attenuation that is
applied to the output. Attenuation reduction is indicated by the lit or blinking
input buttons: when fewer input buttons are lit, attenuation is greater (and the
volume is quieter).
•
At minimum volume, all input buttons are unlit or background illuminated
and 76 dB of attenuation is applied to the output. The audio output is
effectively muted.
•
The first step of volume increase causes the Input 1 button to blink (slowly, in
the case of switchers with 12 input buttons). Attenuation is reduced by 13 dB
(63 dB of attenuation is applied to the output).
•
The second step of volume increase reduces the attenuation by an additional
1 dB (62 dB of attenuation is applied to the output). (On switchers with 32
input buttons the Input 1 button lights steadily.)
•
Successive steps of volume increase cause consecutive buttons to first blink,
then light steadily. (On switchers with 32 input buttons, each consecutive
button indicates a 1 dB attenuation reduction when blinking and a 2 dB
attenuation reduction when lit.)
For example: When lit steadily, the Input 3 button indicates the following,
depending on the number of input buttons the switcher has:
•
Switchers with 12 input buttons — 47 dB of attenuation when compared
to the Input 3 button blinking quickly (48 dB to 50 dB of attenuation).
The blinking Input 4 button (45 dB to 46 dB of attenuation) is at least 2 dB
less than the fast blinking Input 3 button (48 dB – 46 dB) and at most 5 dB
less (50 dB – 45 dB).
Switchers with 16 input buttons — 52 dB of attenuation when compared
to the Input 3 button blinking (53 dB to 55 dB of attenuation). The
blinking Input 4 button (49 dB to 51 dB of attenuation) is at least 2 dB less
than the fast blinking Input 3 button (53 dB – 51 dB) and at most and at
most 6 dB less (55 dB – 49 dB).
Switchers with 32 input buttons — 58 dB of attenuation when compared
to the Input 3 button blinking (59 dB of attenuation). The blinking Input
4 button (57 dB of attenuation) is 2 dB less than the steadily-lit Input 2
button (59 dB - 57 dB).
On switcher with 32 input buttons, the buttons’ volume indications are
additive.
For example: Input 1 lit (23 dB [22 dB + 1 dB] of attenuation reduction), Input
2 lit (2 dB [1 dB + 1 dB] of attenuation reduction), and Input 3 blinking (1 dB
of attenuation reduction) indicate that the output attenuation has been
reduced by a total of 25 dB (22 dB + 2 dB + 1 dB = 25 dB).
•
At full volume, no attenuation is applied to the output and all input buttons
are lit steadily.
See the table on page 3-43 to read the volume display.
3-44
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Example 11: Viewing and adjusting an output volume level
The following steps show an example in which the audio output volume is viewed
and adjusted. The steps show the front panel indications that result from your
action.
Audio output volume is displayed differently on different models. See the table on
page 3-43.
For this reason, figure 3-69 and figure 3-72 show the indications displayed on a
switcher with 12 input buttons and 8 output buttons without duplicating all of the
actions shown in figure 3-68 and figure 3-71, which show switchers with 32 input
buttons. Figure 3-70 and figure 3-73 show the indications displayed on a switcher
with 16 input buttons.
1.
Press and release the Esc button (figure 3-66).
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
Figure 3-66 — Clear all selections
2.
Press and hold the Audio button for approximately 2 seconds (figure 3-67).
AUDIO
Press and hold the Audio button until it blinks.
2 seconds
AUDIO
Figure 3-67 — Select Audio mode
Volume is protected when front panel lock mode 2 is selected. You can view
the volume in lock mode 2, but not change it from the front panel.
If front panel lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform steps 3 and 4, the
actions are ignored and the Enter, RGBHV/Video, and Audio buttons flash.
3.
Press and release the output 17 button (figure 3-68).
The input buttons display the selected output's audio volume level.
Blinking button
Green
1
Press and release the
Output 17 button. The
button lights green.
2
6
17 18 12
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
1
2
3
• –39 dB attenuation
• 41.5% volume
Unlit
4 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 27 28 29 30 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
Unlit
Each lit input button beyond input 1 indicates 3 percent of the total input volume is
applied to the output. The flashing button indicates an additional 1.5 percent.
In this example, the green input buttons indicate 41.5 percent of the applied audio
input. The unlit input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of 39 dB.
Figure 3-68 — Select output 17
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-45
Operation, cont’d
Figure 3-69 shows the same volume (41.5%) as in figure 3-68, but displayed on
a 12-input-button switcher, such as a CrossPoint 450 Plus 128 HVA.
Slow blinking button
–39 dB attenuation,
41.5% volume
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
Unlit button
Lit button
• The input LEDs display the selected output's audio volume level.
• In this example, the lit/blinking input buttons indicate 40 to 41.5 percent of the
applied audio input.
• The unlit/blinking input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of 39 dB
to 40 dB.
Figure 3-69 — Volume display on a 12-input-button, 8-output button
switcher
Figure 3-70 shows the same volume (41.5%) as in figure 3-68, but displayed on
a 16-input-button switcher, such as a CrossPoint 1616 HVA.
Blinking button
–39 dB attenuation,
41.5% volume
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Lit button
Unlit button
• The input LEDs display the selected output's audio volume level.
• In this example, the lit/blinking input buttons indicate 41.5 to 44.5 percent of the applied audio input.
• The unlit/blinking input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of 37 dB to 39 dB.
Figure 3-70 — Volume display on a 16-input-button switcher
3-46
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
4.
Press and release the Esc (
by 1.5%.
) button once (figure 3-71) to increase the volume
Press and release the Esc ( ) button several more times (figure 3-71) to
increase the volume by 1.5% per button push. Note the input button
indication changes that occur each time the Esc ( ) button is pressed and
released.
You can press and hold the Esc ( ) or View ( ) button to ramp the level up
or down by 3 dB per second to the high or low limit.
Figure 3-71 show the result of pressing the Esc (
) button a total of 13 times.
Press the Esc button
ESC
1
Decrease the audio
attenuation (thereby
increasing the audio level)
that is applied to the
output volume level by 1
dB per button push.
2
3
4 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 27 28 29 30 31 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
26 dB attenuation,
61% volume
• The input buttons display the selected output's audio volume level.
• Each lit input button beyond input 1 indicates 3 percent of the total
input volume is applied to the output.
• In this example, the green input buttons display 61 percent of the
applied audio input.
• The unlit input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of 26 dB.
Figure 3-71 — Adjust the output audio volume
Figure 3-72 shows the same volume (61%) as in figure 3-71, but displayed on a
12-input-button switcher, such as a CrossPoint 450 Plus 450 128 HVA.
Fast Blinking Button
-26 dB attenuation
61% volume
1
2
3
4
5
Lit Buttons
6
7
8
9 10 11 12
Unlit Buttons
• The input LEDs display the selected output’s audio volume level.
• In this example, the lit/blinking input buttons indicate 59.5 to 61 percent
of the applied audio input.
• The unlit/blinking input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of
26 dB to 27 dB.
Figure 3-72 — Volume display on a 12-input-button, 8-output button
switcher
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-47
Operation, cont’d
Figure 3-73 shows the same volume (61%) as in figure 3-71, but displayed on a
16-input-button switcher, such as a CrossPoint 1616 HVA.
Blinking Button
-26 dB attenuation
61% volume
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Lit Buttons
Unlit Buttons
• The input LEDs display the selected output’s audio volume level.
• In this example, the lit/blinking input buttons indicate 59.5 to 62.5 percent of the applied audio input.
• The unlit/blinking input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of 25 dB to 27 dB.
Figure 3-73 — Volume display on a 16-input-button switcher
Press and release the Audio button (figure 3-74).
5.
Press the Audio button
to exit audio mode.
I/O
The RGBHV or Video
button lights green.
RGBHV AUDIO
The Audio button stops
blinking and lights.
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
Figure 3-74 — Deselect Audio mode
Setting the front panel locks (Executive modes)
The matrix switchers have three levels of front panel security lock that limit the
operation of the switcher from the front panel. The three levels are:
•
Lock mode 0 — The front panel is completely unlocked. All front panel
functions are available.
•
Lock mode 1 — All changes are locked from the front panel (except for
setting Lock mode 2). Some functions can be viewed.
•
Lock mode 2 — Basic functions are unlocked. Advanced features are locked
and can be viewed only.
Basic features consist of:
3-48
Making ties
Saving and recalling presets
Setting input audio gain and attenuation
Changing Lock modes
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Advanced features consist of:
Creating I/O groups
Setting RGB delay
Setting video and audio output mutes
Setting audio output volume
Setting the rear panel remote port protocol and baud rate
The switcher ships from the factory in Lock mode 2.
Selecting Lock mode 2 or toggling between mode 2 and mode 0
If the switcher is in Lock mode 0 or mode 1, this procedure selects mode 2.
If the switcher is in Lock mode 2, this procedure selects mode 0 (unlocks the
switcher).
To toggle the lock on and off, press and hold the Enter button, the RGBHV
(CrossPoint 450 Plus) or Video (MAV Plus) button, and the Audio button for
approximately two seconds (figure 3-75).
Press and hold the Enter, RGBHV /Video, and Audio
buttons simultaneously to turn on Lock mode 2 or to
toggle between mode 2 and mode 0.
I/O
VIDEO
ENTER
AUDIO
I/O
2 seconds
ENTER
VIDEO
AUDIO
The Enter, RGBHV/ Video,
and Audio buttons blink
twice to indicate the mode
change.
Release the buttons.
Figure 3-75 — Toggle front panel lock on (mode 2) or off (mode 0)
Selecting Lock mode 2 or toggling between mode 2 and mode 1
If the switcher is in Lock mode 0 or mode 1, this procedure selects mode 2.
If the switcher in in Lock mode 2, this procedure selects mode 1.
To toggle the lock on and off, press and hold the RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus) or
Video (MAV Plus) button and the Audio button for approximately two seconds
(figure 3-76).
Press and hold the RGBHV /Video and Audio
buttons simultaneously to turn on Lock mode 2
or to toggle between mode 1 and mode 2.
I/O
VIDEO
I/O
AUDIO
2 seconds
VIDEO
AUDIO
The RGBHV/ Video
and Audio buttons
blink twice to indicate
the mode change.
Release the buttons.
Figure 3-76 — Toggle front panel lock between mode 2 and mode 1
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-49
Operation, cont’d
Performing a system reset from the front panel
The front panel reset is identical to the Esc ZXXX SIS command (see chapter 4,
“Programmer’s Guide”). A system reset clears all ties and presets, all video and
audio mutes, resets all I/O grouping, sets all input audio levels to unity gain
(+0 dB), and sets all output volume levels to 100% (0 dB of attenuation).
Reset the switcher to the factory default settings by pressing and holding the
RGBHV (CrossPoint 450 Plus) or Video (MAV Plus) button and Audio button while
you apply AC power to the switcher (figure 3-77).
System reset does not reset the Internet protocol (IP) settings or replace userinstalled firmware.
Press and hold the RGBHV/Video and
Audio buttons while you apply power to
the switcher.
2
I/O
The switcher flashes
the button indicators
and then turns them off.
VIDEO
1
AUDIO
Continue to hold the RGBHV/Video and
Audio buttons until all input and output
buttons return to either unlit or to
background illumination and the RGBHV
or Video and Audio buttons turn on.
Power
Release the RGBHV/Video and Audio buttons.
Figure 3-77 — System reset
Background illumination
The buttons on the front panel can be set to provide amber background
illumination at all times or the background illumination can be turned off. To
toggle the background illumination on or off, press and hold the Input 1 and
Input 2 buttons for approximately two seconds (figure 3-78).
Press and hold the Input 1 and Input 2
buttons simultaneously to toggle
background illumination mode on or off.
1
2
3 16
17 18 19 32
I
N
P
U
T
S
After approximately 2 seconds, release
the Input 1 and Input 2 buttons.
Figure 3-78 — Toggle background illumination on or off
3-50
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate
This procedure affects the rear panel Remote port only. The front panel
Configuration (RS-232) port’s variables can be changed under serial port or
Ethernet control only. See the Command/Response table for IP SIS commands,
in chapter 4, “Programmer’s Guide”, to configure either port under SIS
control.
The Remote port settings are protected when front panel lock mode 2 is
selected. You can view the settings in lock mode 2, but not adjust them from
the front panel.
The switcher can support either RS-232 or RS-422 serial communication protocol,
and operate at 9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200 baud rates. The settings of these
variables can be viewed and changed from the front panel.
View and configure the switcher’s serial communications settings as follows:
1.
To enter Serial Port Configuration mode, simultaneously press and hold all
Control buttons (Enter, Preset, View, and Esc) (figure 3-79).
Press and hold the Enter, Preset,
View, and Esc buttons.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
I/O
C O NT R O L
ESC
2 seconds
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
• All Control buttons light with
one flashing.
RGBHV AUDIO
• Both I/O buttons light
with one flashing.
The flashing Control button indicates the baud rate as follows:
Enter — 9600
Preset — 19200
View — 38400
Esc — 115200
The flashing I/O button indicates the protocol as follows:
RGBHV/Video — RS-232
Audio — RS-422/RS-485
In this example, the port is set to RS-232 at 9600 baud.
Figure 3-79 — RS-232/RS-422 and baud rate display
2.
Release the Control buttons.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-51
Operation, cont’d
The serial port settings are protected when front panel lock mode 2 is selected.
You can view the settings in lock mode 2, but not change them from the front
panel.
If front panel lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform step 3, the actions
are ignored and the Enter, RGBHV/Video, and Audio buttons flash.
3.
To change a value, press and release the button that relates to the desired
value (figure 3-80).
Press and release the button(s) to configure the port as
follows:
Baud rate:
Enter — 9600
Preset — 19200
View — 38400
Esc — 115200
Serial protocol:
RGBHV/Video — RS-232
Audio — RS-422/RS-485
The selected buttons blink and the others remain lit.
In this example, the port is set to RS-422 at 38400 baud.
I/O
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
RGBHV AUDIO
= Blinking button
Figure 3-80 — RS-232/RS-422 and baud rate selection
4.
Press and release an input or output button to exit the Serial Port Configuration
mode (figure 3-81).
Press and release an
input or output button.
All Control and I/O buttons return to unlit or background illumination.
I/O
CONTROL
5
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
RGBHV AUDIO
Figure 3-81 — Exit Serial Port Configuration mode
3-52
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Rear Panel Controls
The rear panel has a Reset button that initiates four levels of matrix switcher resets.
Press and hold the button while the switcher is running or while you apply power
to the switcher for different reset levels.
Performing soft system resets
The CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus switchers have three soft resets available
that restore various tiers of switcher settings to their default settings.
•
Events (mode 3) reset — This function toggles the monitoring of events on or
off (if events monitoring was on, this function turns it off; if it was off, it is
turned on).
•
IP settings (mode 4) reset — The IP settings reset performs the following
functions:
Enables Arp program capability
Resets the IP address to the factory default (192.168.254.254)
Resets the subnet mask to the factory default (255.255.0.0)
Resets the gateway address to its factory default (0.0.0.0)
Turn DHCP off
Turn events off
IP settings reset does not replace any user-installed firmware.
•
Absolute (mode 5) reset — Absolute reset restores the switcher to the default
factory conditions. This function is identical to the Esc ZQQQ SIS
command, see chapter 4, “Programmer’s Guide”).
Perform a soft reset of the switcher as follows:
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-53
Operation, cont’d
Press and hold the Reset button until the front panel RGBHV
(CrossPoint 450 Plus)/Video (MAV Plus) and Audio buttons blink once
(events reset), twice (system reset), or three times (absolute reset) (figure 3-82).
RESET
Events Reset
Reset LED flashes once.
Release, then immediately
press and release again.
3 seconds
RESET
Press and hold
the Reset button.
RESET
1.
Front panel I/O buttons flash once.
I/O
RGBHV AUDIO
Reset LED flashes twice.
Release, then immediately
press and release again.
6 seconds
RESET
RESET
IP Settings
Reset
RESET
Press and hold
the Reset button.
Front panel I/O buttons flash twice.
I/O
RGBHV AUDIO
Release, then immediately
press and release again.
9 seconds
RESET
Reset LED flashes
three times.
RESET
Absolute Reset
RESET
Press and hold
the Reset button.
Front panel I/O buttons flash three times.
I/O
RGBHV AUDIO
NOTE The Reset button on switchers with matrix sizes of 24 x 12 and above
have a different appearance and do not have a rear panel Reset LED.
Figure 3-82 — Whole switcher and absolute resets
2.
Release the Reset button and then immediately press and hold the Reset
button until the LED flashes three times. Release the Reset button. Nothing
happens if the second momentary press does not occur within 1 second.
Performing a hard reset
The hard reset function restores the switcher to the base firmware that it shipped
with. After a hard reset, events do not automatically start, but user settings and
files are restored. Perform a hard reset as follows:
3-54
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
The hard reset restores the factory-installed firmware. The switcher reverts to
that factory firmware the next time power is cycled off and on unless a
firmware update is performed before the power cycle.
1.
If necessary, turn off power to the switcher.
2.
Press and hold the Reset button on the rear panel while you apply AC power
to the switcher (figure 3-83).
RESET
Press and hold the Reset button while
you apply power to the switcher.
2
1
The switcher flashes the front panel
button indicators green, red, and
amber and then turns them off.
Power
Continue to hold the Reset button until all input
and output buttons return to either unlit or to
background illumination and the RGBHV or
Video and Audio buttons turn on.
RESET
Release the Reset button.
NOTE The Reset button on switchers with matrix sizes of 24 x 12 and above
have a different appearance and do not have a rear panel Reset LED.
Figure 3-83 — Hard reset
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-55
Operation, cont’d
Optimizing the Audio (Audio Switchers)
Each individual input audio level can be adjusted within a range of -18 dB to
+24 dB, so there are no noticeable volume differences between sources and for the
best headroom and signal-to-noise ratio. Adjust the audio gain and attenuation as
follows:
1.
Connect audio sources to all desired inputs and connect the audio outputs to
output devices such as audio players. See “Audio input and output
connections (audio models only)”, in chapter 2, “Installation”. For best
results, wire all of the inputs and the outputs balanced.
2.
Power on the audio sources, the switcher, and the audio players.
3.
Switch among the inputs (see “Creating ties”, in this chapter), listening to the
audio with a critical ear or measuring the output audio level with test
equipment, such as a VU meter.
4.
As necessary, adjust the input audio level of each input (see “Viewing and
adjusting the input audio level (audio models)”, in this chapter) so that the
approximate output level is the same for all selected inputs.
5.
As necessary, adjust the output audio level of each input (see “Viewing and
adjusting the output volume (audio models)”, in this chapter).
Troubleshooting
This section gives recommendations on what to do if you have problems operating
the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher, and it describes an actual image
problem that Extron has encountered.
General checks
1.
Ensure that all devices are plugged in and powered on. The switcher is
receiving power if one of the front panel Power Supply LEDs is lit green.
2.
Check to see if one or more outputs are muted.
3.
Ensure an active input is selected for output on the switcher.
4.
Ensure that the proper signal format is supplied.
5.
Check the cabling and make corrections as necessary.
6.
Call the Extron S3 Sales & Technical Support Hotline if necessary.
Plasma display S-video problem (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only)
Extron has encountered a problem when a CrossPoint 450 Plus switcher routes
S-video that is output by some video conference codecs. Some codecs change the
DC offset on the chrominance (C) so that it is very different from the level on the
luminance (Y). This can cause a plasma display to come up in the wrong size
mode.
With the matrix switcher taken out of the system, the plasma works fine. It looks
like a problem with the matrix switcher, but it is not. The matrix switcher boosts
the bad codec output, which makes the plasma go to the wrong setting.
Solution: Try placing an Extron video DC block adapter, part #26-495-01, on the
luminance (Y) input to the switcher from the codec.
3-56
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Configuration Worksheets
Rather than trying to remember the configuration for each preset, use worksheets
to record this information. Make copies of the blank worksheet on page 3-61
(32-input button and -output button switchers) and page 3-63 (16-button switchers)
and use one for each preset configuration. The worksheet accommodates all of the
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus models. Cross out all unused or inactive inputs
and outputs. Use different colors for video and audio.
Worksheet example 1: System equipment
Figure 3-84 shows a worksheet for a CrossPoint 450 Plus 2424 HVA in a fictional
organization with the system hardware annotated. Inputs 10, 11, and 21 through 24
have no connections in this organization, so they have been crossed out on the
worksheet. A CrossPoint 450 Plus 2424 does not have inputs 25 through 32, so they
are crossed out. Similarly, outputs 7, 14, 15, 16, and 25 through 32 are crossed out.
Inputs include PCs, an audio CD player, cameras, and an Extron VTG 300. Output
devices include monitors, front and rear projectors, a stereo, and a VCR for
recording presentations.
The Extron VTG 300 video test generator connected to input 12 enables a video test
pattern to be sent to one, several, or all output devices for problem isolation or
adjustment purposes. An audio test tape or CD could be used in a similar manner
to check out the audio components.
Camera
main
podium
17
Laptop
Camera Podium RGB 201
#2
Mic
Rxi
18
Demo
rack #1
USP 405
Main
Hall
PJ#1
17
Demo
wallbox
#1
19
20
Demo Demo
rack #2 rack #3
USP 405 USP 405
Main
Hall
PJ#2
Podium
monitor
18
19
21
22
23
24
25
VTG
300
26
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox
#1
#2
#3
#4
27
28
29
Demo
room
PJ #1
Demo
rack
monitor
Demo
rack
switcher
27
28
29
30
31
32
30
31
32
Demo
rack #4
USP 405
Conf.
room
20
Demo Demo
wallbox wallbox
#2
#3
Classroom Classroom PC1 Rack DVD
Audio #1 VCR #2 VCR RGB 201 (DVS)
CD (DVS 406) (DVS 406) Rxi
Sound
VCR
system (USP 405)
#2
21
Demo Demo
wallbox wallbox
#5
#4
22
Lobby
Class
Class
monitor room #1 room #2
monitor monitor
23
Demo Demo
wallbox wallbox
#6
#7
24
25
26
Demo
wallbox
#8
Worksheet Example
Figure 3-84 — Worksheet example 1: System equipment
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-57
Operation, cont’d
Worksheet example 2: Daily configuration
Figure 3-85 continues from worksheet example 1 by showing the video and audio
ties that make up the configuration of preset 1. A solid ink line shows video ties
and a dashed pencil line shows the audio ties.
In this example:
•
•
•
•
Camera
main
podium
17
In the main hall (output 1)
In the conference room (output 4) to the overflow crowd
In the lobby (output 8)
Tied to the VCR (output 6)
The presenter has a presentation on her laptop computer (input 4) that is scan
converted and displayed:
In the main hall (output 2)
Locally on the podium (output 3)
The audio from her microphone (input 3) is played:
In the hall (output 1)
In the conference room (output 4)
Sent to the VCR
Classical music from the CD player (input 5) is played:
In the background in the main hall on sound system #2 (output 5)
In the lobby (output 8)
Laptop
Camera Podium RGB 201
#2
Mic
Rxi
18
Demo
rack #1
USP 405
The image of the presenter, from the main podium camera (input 1), is
displayed:
19
20
Demo Demo
rack #2 rack #3
USP 405 USP 405
Main
Hall
PJ#2
Podium
monitor
Conf.
room
17
18
19
20
Demo Demo
wallbox wallbox
#2
#3
21
22
23
24
25
VTG
300
26
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox
#1
#2
#3
#4
27
28
29
Demo
room
PJ #1
Demo
rack
monitor
Demo
rack
switcher
27
28
29
Sound
VCR
system (USP 405)
#2
21
Demo Demo
wallbox wallbox
#4
#5
22
Lobby
Class
Class
monitor room #1 room #2
monitor monitor
23
Demo Demo
wallbox wallbox
#6
#7
24
25
26
Demo
wallbox
#8
Worksheet Example
Figure 3-85 — Worksheet example 2: Daily configuration
3-58
30
31
32
30
31
32
Demo
rack #4
USP 405
Main
Hall
PJ#1
Demo
wallbox
#1
Classroom Classroom PC1 Rack DVD
Audio #1 VCR #2 VCR RGB 201 (DVS)
CD (DVS 500) (DVS 500) Rxi
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
Worksheet example 3: Test configuration
The A/V system in our fictional organization needs to be fine tuned on a regular
basis. Figure 3-86 shows a typical test configuration, with an Extron video test
generator (input 12) generating a test pattern to all monitors (outputs 1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9,
10, and 12). Sound checks are run from the CD player (input 5) to all audio systems
(outputs 1, 2, 4, 5, and 8).
Camera
main
podium
17
Laptop
Camera Podium RGB 201
Mic
#2
Rxi
18
Demo
rack #1
USP 405
Main
Hall
PJ#1
17
Demo
wallbox
#1
19
20
Demo Demo
rack #2 rack #3
USP 405 USP 405
Main
Hall
PJ#2
Podium
monitor
18
19
32
21
22
23
24
25
VTG
300
26
Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox Floorbox
#1
#2
#3
#4
27
28
29
Demo
room
PJ #1
Demo
rack
monitor
Demo
rack
switcher
27
28
29
30
31
32
30
31
32
Demo
rack #4
USP 405
Conf.
room
20
Demo Demo
wallbox wallbox
#2
#3
PC1 Rack DVD
RGB 201 (DVS)
Rxi
Audio
CD
Sound
VCR
system (USP 405)
#2
21
Demo Demo
wallbox wallbox
#4
#5
22
Lobby
Class
Class
monitor room #1 room #2
monitor monitor
23
Demo Demo
wallbox wallbox
#6
#7
24
25
26
Demo
wallbox
#8
Worksheet Example
Figure 3-86 — Worksheet example 3: Test configuration
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-59
Operation, cont’d
3-60
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-61
18
17
Title:
19
3
19
3
20
4
20
4
21
5
21
5
Video:
22
6
22
6
23
7
23
7
24
8
24
8
25
9
25
9
Audio:
Output destinations
26
10
26
10
27
11
27
11
28
12
28
12
32-button switchers configuration worksheet
Fill in the preset number and use colors, or dashes, etc. to make connecting lines.
Indicate if the configuration is for Video, Audio, or both.
Preset #
2
18
17
1
2
1
Input sources
29
13
29
13
30
14
30
14
31
15
31
15
32
16
32
16
Operation, cont’d
This page was intentionally left blank.
3-62
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
3-63
2
1
Title:
3
3
4
4
5
5
Video:
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
Audio:
Output destinations
11
11
10
10
12
12
13
13
16-button and smaller switchers configuration worksheet
Fill in the preset number and use colors, or dashes, etc. to make connecting lines.
Indicate if the configuration is for video, audio, or both.
Preset #
2
1
Input sources
14
14
15
15
16
16
Operation, cont’d
This page was intentionally left blank.
3-64
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Operation
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers
4
Chapter Four
Programmer’s Guide
Serial Ports
Ethernet Link
Host-to-Switcher Instructions
Switcher-Initiated Messages
Switcher Error Responses
Using the Command/Response Tables
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands
Command Response Table for IP SIS Commands
Special Characters
Programmer’s Guide,
cont’d
Programmer’s
Guide
Serial Ports
The switcher has one or two serial ports that can be connected to a host device such
as a computer running the HyperTerminal utility, an RS-232 capable PDA, or a
control system. These ports make serial control of the switcher possible. The serial
ports are:
•
The rear panel Remote (RS-232 or RS-422) port, a 9-pin D female connector
•
The front panel Configuration (RS-232) port, a 2.5 mm mini stereo jack
(matrix sizes up to 1616 only)
The default protocol for both ports is as follows:
• 9600 baud
• no parity
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
• no flow control
The ports can be configured to operate at the 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200 baud
rate.
These two ports are independent of one another. A front panel Configuration
port connection and a rear panel Remote port connection can both be active at
the same time.
The switcher can operate at 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200 baud rates, but
Extron recommends leaving these ports at 9600 baud only.
Rear panel Remote port
1
5
6
9
RS232/RS422
REMOTE
All Models
84 through 1616
Matrix Sizes
2412 through 3232
Matrix Sizes
Pin RS-232 Function
RS-422 Function
RS-422 Function
1
— Not used
—
Not used
TX+ Transmit data (+)
2
TX Transmit data
TX– Transmit data (–) TX– Transmit data (–)
3
RX Receive data
RX– Receive data (–) RX+ Receive data (+)
4
— Not used
—
Not used
RX– Receive data (–)
5
Gnd Signal ground Gnd Signal ground
Gnd Signal Ground
Not used
6
— Not used
—
Not used
—
Not used
7
— Not used
RX+ Receive data (+)
—
Not used
8
— Not used
TX+ Transmit data (+)
—
Not used
9
— Not used
—
Not used
—
Figure 4-1 — Remote connector pin assignments
The rear panel Remote port can support either RS-232 or RS-422 serial
communication protocol, and can operate at 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200
baud rates. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port protocol and baud rate”
in chapter 3, “Operation”, to configure the rear panel Remote port from the
front panel.
4-2
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
Front panel Configuration port (matrix sizes up to 1616 only)
This port is hardwired for RS-232 only.
The optional 9-pin D to 2.5 mm mini jack TRS RS-232 cable, part #70-335-01
(figure 4-2) can be used for connection to the Configuration port.
6 feet
(1.8 m)
Part #70-335-01
1
6
9
5
Tip
Ring
Sleeve (Gnd)
9-pin D
Connection
TRS Plug
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 5
Computer's RX line
Computer's TX line
Computer's signal ground
Tip
Ring
Sleeve
Figure 4-2 — Optional 9-pin TRS RS-232 cable
This port is independent of the rear panel Remote port and is not affected by
changes to the rear panel port’s protocol. This front panel port’s protocol can
be changed, under SIS command control only. See the Command/Response
table for IP SIS commands, later in this chapter, to configure both ports under
SIS control.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
4-3
Programmer’s Guide, cont’d
Ethernet Link
The rear panel Ethernet connector on the switcher can be connected to an Ethernet
LAN or WAN. This connection makes SIS control of the switcher possible using a
computer connected to the same LAN or WAN.
Ethernet connection
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover
cable and must be properly terminated for your application (figure 4-2).
•
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher.
•
Patch (straight) cable — Connection of the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus
switcher to an Ethernet LAN.
Patch (straight) cable
Pin
Side
RJ-45
connector
Insert
Twisted
Pair Wires
Side 1
Wire color
Pin
Side 2
Wire color
1
White-orange
1
White-orange
2
Orange
2
Orange
3
White-green
3
White-green
4
Blue
4
Blue
5
White-blue
5
White-blue
6
Green
6
Green
7
White-brown
7
White-brown
8
Brown
8
Brown
Crossover cable
Pin
Side 1
Wire color
Pin
Side 2
Wire color
1
White-orange
1
White-green
2
Orange
2
Green
3
White-green
3
White-orange
4
Blue
4
Blue
5
White-blue
5
White-blue
6
Green
6
Orange
7
White-brown
7
White-brown
8
Brown
8
Brown
Figure 4-2 — RJ-45 Ethernet connector pin assignments
Default IP addresses
To access the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher via the Ethernet port, you
will need the Extron IP address, and may need the subnet mask and the gateway
address. If the IP address has been changed to an address comprised of words and
characters, the actual numeric IP address can be determined using the ping (ICMP)
utility (see appendix A, “Ethernet Connection”, for more details). If the addresses
have not been changed, the factory-specified defaults are:
• IP address
• Gateway address
4-4
192.168.254.254
0.0.0.0
• Subnet mask
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
255.255.0.0
Host-to-Switcher Instructions
The switcher accepts SIS (Simple Instruction Set) commands through the
serial ports and Ethernet port. SIS commands consist of one or more characters per
command field. They do not require any special characters to begin or end the
command character sequence. Each switcher response to an SIS command ends
with a carriage return and a line feed (CR/LF = ), which signals the end of the
response character string. A string is one or more characters.
Switcher-Initiated Messages
When a local event such as a front panel operation occurs, the switcher responds by
sending a message to the host. The switcher-initiated messages are listed below
(underlined).
(c) Copyright 2007, Extron Electronics CP 300 450 MAV IP, Vx.xx, 60-nnn-nn{day,
date, time}
The switcher initiates the copyright message when it is first powered on or when
connection via Internet protocol (IP) is established. Vx.xx is the firmware version
number and 60-nnn-nn is the switcher part number.
{Day, date, time} are only reported if the connection is via the LAN port.
Password:
The switcher initiates the password message immediately after the copyright
message when the controlling system is connected using TCP/IP or Telnet and the
switcher is password protected. This message means that the switcher requires an
administrator or user level password before it will perform the commands entered
via this link. The switcher repeats the password message response for every entry
other than a valid password until a valid password is entered.
Login Administrator
Login User
The switcher initiates the login message when a correct administrator or user
password has been entered. If the user and administrator passwords are the same,
the switcher defaults to administrator privileges.
Qik
The switcher initiates the Qik message when a front panel switching operation has
occurred.
Sprnn
The switcher initiates the Spr message when a memory preset has been saved from
the front panel. “nn” is the preset number.
Rprnn
The switcher initiates the Rpr message when a memory preset has been recalled
from the front panel. “nn” is the preset number.
Innn Audxx
The switcher initiates the Aud message when a front panel input audio level
change has occurred. “nn” is the input number and “xx” is the dB level.
Outnn Volxx
The switcher initiates the Vol message when a front panel output audio volume
change has occurred. “nn” is the output number and “xx” is the volume level.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
4-5
Programmer’s Guide, cont’d
Vmtnn•x
The switcher initiates the Vmt message when a video output mute is toggled on or
off from the front panel. “nn” is the output number, • is a space, and “x” is the
mute status: 1 = on, 0 = off.
Amtnn•x
The switcher initiates the Amt message when an audio output mute is toggled on
or off from the front panel. “nn” is the output number, • is a space, and “x” is the
mute status: 1 = on, 0 = off.
Exen
The switcher initiates the Exe message when executive mode is toggled on or off
from the front panel. “n” is the executive mode status: 1 = on, 0 = off.
Switcher Error Responses
When the switcher receives an SIS command and determines that it is valid, it
performs the command and sends a response to the host device. If the switcher is
unable to perform the command because the command is invalid or contains
invalid parameters, the switcher returns an error response to the host. The error
response codes are:
E01 — Invalid input channel number (too large)
E10 — Invalid command
E11 — Invalid preset number
E12 — Invalid output number (too large)
E13 — Invalid value (out of range)
E14 — Illegal command for this configuration
E17 — Timeout (caused only by direct write of global presets)
E21 — Invalid room number
E24 — Privilege violation (Ethernet, Extron software only)
Using the Command/Response Tables
The command/response tables begin on page 4-7. Lower case letters are acceptable
in the command field except where indicated for the gain and attenuation
commands. The table below shows the hexadecimal equivalent of each ASCII
character used in the command/response table.
ASCII to HEX Conversion Table
Space
Symbols are used throughout the table to represent variables in the command/
response fields. Command and response examples are shown throughout the
table.
4-6
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands
Symbol Definitions:
= Carriage return/line feed
= Carriage return (no line feed)
•
= Space
Esc
= Escape key
Input and output numbers in commands may be entered as either 1-digit, 2-digit, or 3-digit
numbers. All input and output numbers are reported as 2-digit numbers in the response.
X1
= Input number
01 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)
X2
= Input number (for tie)
00 – (maximum number of inputs) (00 = untied)
X3
= Output number
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)
X4
= Numeric dB value
–18 to +24 (45 steps of gain or attenuation)
X5
= Audio gain
0 – 24 (1 dB/step)
X6
= Audio attenuation
1 – 18 (1 dB/step)
X7
= Volume adjustment range
0 – 64 (1 dB/step except for 0-to-1, which is 13 dB)
X8
= Room # (for room presets)
10 max. (each can have up to 10 presets ( X12 s) assigned)
A Room is a subset of operator-selec ted outputs that relate to each other. The CrossPoint 450 Plus
or MAV Plus switcher supports up to 10 rooms, each of which can consist of from 1 to 16 outputs.
X9
= Mute, Lock mode, power supply
(0 = off/mode 0/not Ok, 1 = on/mode 1/Ok, 2 = mode 2)
X10
= Group # (for I/O grouping)
1 through 4 groups (0 = no group)
X11
= Global preset #
0, 01-32 maximum (0 = current configuration)
X12
= Room preset #
10 maximum (0 = current configuration for room)
A Room preset is a stored configuration with all of the outputs assigned to a single room.
When a room preset is retrieved from memory, it becomes the current configuration.
X13
= RGB delay interval
Delay in ½ second increments (10 maximum)
X14
= Video/audio mute:
0 = no mutes
1 = video mute
2 = audio mute
3 = video and audio mute
X15
= Sync frequency
xxx.xx (frequency in Hz (V) or kHz (H))
X16
= Connection status
0 = no input connected
1 = input connected
X17
= Firmware version number to second decimal place (x.xx)
X18
= Verbose firmware version-description-upload date/time. See page 4-16.
X19
= Name
12 characters maximum for input, output, global preset,
and room preset names.
11 characters maximum for room names.
Upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters and
_ / and spaces are valid.
The following characters are invalid in the name: {space} ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
X20
= Voltage
Positive or negative voltage and magnitude
X21
= Temperature
Degrees Fahrenheit
X22
= Fan speed
RPM
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
4-7
Programmer’s Guide, cont’d
Command/response table for SIS commands
Command
ASCII Command Response
(host to switcher)
Additional description
(switcher to host)
Create ties
•
Commands can be made back-to-back in a string, with no spaces.
For example: 1*1!02*02&003*003%4*24$.
•
The quick multiple tie and tie input to all output commands activate all I/O switches
simultaneously.
•
The CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus support 1-, 2-, and 3-digit numeric entries
(1*1, 02*02, or 001*001).
Tie input X2 to output
and audio (A)
Example:
X3 ,
video (V)
X2 * X3 !
Out X3 •In X2 •All
1*3!
Out03 •In01•All
Tie input X2 to output X3 , RGBHV only X2 * X3 &
Example (see Note):
10*4&
X2 * X3 %
Tie input X2 to output X3 , video only
Example (see Note):
7*5%
Out X3 •In X2 RGB
Out04•In10•RGB
Out X3 •In X2 •Vid
Out05•In07•Vid
Tie input X2 ’s video and audio
to output X3 .
Tie input 1 V & A to output 3.
Audio breakaway.
Tie input 10 RGB to output 4.
Audio breakaway.
Tie input 7 video to output 5.
The & tie command for RGB and the % tie command for video can be used interchangeably on
the CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus switchers.
Tie input X2 to output
Example:
Quick multiple tie
X3 ,
audio only
Example:
X2 * X3 $
Out X3 •In X2 •Aud
12*24$
Out24•In12•Aud
Esc +Q X2 * X3 !… X2 * X3 !
Qik
Esc +Q3*4!3*5%3*6$
Qik
Tie input to all outputs, V & A
Example:
X2 *!
5*!
In X2 •All
In05•All
Tie input to all outputs, RGBHV only
Example (see Note):
Tie input to all outputs, video only
Example (see Note) :
X2 *&
28*&
X2 *%
14*%
In X2 •RGB
In28•RGB
In X2 •Vid
In14•Vid
Audio breakaway.
Tie input 12 audio to output 24.
Tie input 3 video and audio to
output 4, tie input 3 video to
output 5, and tie input 3 audio to
output 6.
Tie input 5 video and audio to all
outputs.
Tie input 28 RGB to all outputs.
Tie input 14 video to all outputs.
The & tie all command for RGB and the % tie all command for video can be used
interchangeably on the CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus switchers.
Tie input to all outputs, audio only
Example:
X2 *$
1*$
In X2 •Aud
In01•Aud
Read RGBHV output tie
X3 &
X2
RGBHV input
X3 .
Read video output tie
X3 %
X2
Video input
Tie input 1 audio to all outputs.
Read ties
X2
X2
tied to output
tied to output
X3 .
The & read tie command for RGB and the % read tie command for video can be used
interchangeably on the CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus switchers.
Read audio output tie
X3 $
Audio input
X2
X2
tied to output
X3 .
Digital Sync Validation Processing (DSVP)
List individual sync frequency
Example:
X1 LS
2LS
X15
, X15
031.50,060.00
Listed as H freq., V freq.
Input 2 frequency is 31.5 kHz
horizontal and 60 Hz vertical.
The matrix switcher returns 000.00,000.00 if there is no connection or sync frequencies are not
applicable.
4-8
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
Command/response table for SIS commands (Cont’d)
Command
ASCII Command Response
(host to switcher)
View connections
(CrossPoint 450 Plus only)
0LS
Additional description
(switcher to host)
X16 1 X16 2•...• X2 n
Each X16 response is the
connection status of an input,
starting from input 1, n is the
maximum number of inputs for
this model.
Video mute commands
RGB/video mute
RGB/video unmute
X3 *1B
Read RGB/video mute
X3 B
X9
Mute output X3 RGB (video off).
Unmute output X3 RGB (video
on).
1= mute on, 0 = mute off.
Global RGB/video mute
Global RGB/video unmute
1*B
0*B
Vmt1
Vmt0
Mute all RGB outputs.
Unmute all RGB outputs.
Set RGB delay
Example:
Esc X3 * X13 D
Out X3 •Dly X13
Out13•Dly07
Read RGB delay
Example:
Esc X3 D
X13
Esc 14D
05
X3 *0B
Vmt X3 *1
Vmt X3 *0
RGB delay
Esc 13*7D
Sets the RGB interval for switches
to output 13 to 3.5 sec. (7 x 0.5 sec.).
Output 14 interval is 2.5 sec.
(5 x 0.5 sec).
Audio input gain and attenuation
The set gain (G) and attenuation (g) commands are case sensitive.
Set input audio gain to + dB value
Example:
Set input audio attenuation to – dB value
Increment gain
Example:
X1 * X5 G
1*2G
X1 * X6 g
X1 +G
5+G
In X1 •Aud X4
In01•Aud+02
In X1 •Aud X4
In X1 •Aud X4
In05•Aud+03
Decrement gain
Example:
X1 –G
7–G
In X1 •Aud X4
In07•Aud–09
Read input gain
X1 G
Set input 1 audio gain to +2 dB.
Increase gain by 1 dB.
Audio input 5 level incremented
from +2 dB to +3 dB.
Decrease gain by 1 dB.
Audio input 7 level decremented
from –8 dB to –9 dB.
X4
Audio output volume
The table on page 4-10 defines the value of each audio volume step.
Set audio volume to specific value
Example:
Increment volume
Example:
X3 * X7 V
1*50v
X3 +V
1+V
Out X3 •Vol X7
Out01•Vol50
Out X3 •Vol X7
Out01•Vol51
Decrement volume
Read output volume
X3 –V
Out X3 •Vol X7
X3 V
X7
Audio mute
X3 *1Z
Amt X3 *1
Audio unmute
X3 *0Z
Amt X3 *0
Read audio mute
Global audio mute
X3 Z
1*Z
Amt1
Global audio unmute
0*Z
Amt0
Set output 1 volume to 79%.
Increase volume by 1 step.
Audio output 1 level
incremented from 79% to 80.5%.
Decrease volume by 1 step.
Audio mute commands
X9
Mute output X3 audio (audio
off).
Unmute output X3 audio (audio
on).
1= mute on, 0 = mute off.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
4-9
Programmer’s Guide, cont’d
Audio volume adjustment settings
X7 value
dB of
attenuation
Output
volume
X7 value
dB of
attenuation
Output
volume
5.5%
23
41
38.5%
45
19
71.5%
62
7%
24
40
40%
46
18
73%
03
61
8.5%
25
39
41.5%
47
17
74.5%
04
60
10%
26
38
43%
48
16
76%
05
59
11.5%
27
37
44.5%
49
15
77.5%
06
58
13%
28
36
46%
50
14
79%
07
57
14.5%
29
35
47.5%
51
13
80.5%
08
56
16%
30
34
49%
52
12
82%
09
55
17.5%
31
33
50.5%
53
11
83.5%
10
54
19%
32
32
52%
54
10
85%
11
53
20.5%
33
31
53.5%
55
9
86.5%
12
52
22%
34
30
55%
56
8
88%
13
51
23.5%
35
29
56.5%
57
7
89.5%
14
50
25%
36
28
58%
58
6
91%
15
49
26.5%
37
27
59.5%
59
5
92.5%
16
48
28%
38
26
61%
60
4
94%
17
47
29.5%
39
25
62.5%
61
3
95.5%
18
46
31%
40
24
64%
62
2
97%
19
45
32.5%
41
23
65.5%
63
1
98.5%
20
44
34%
42
22
67%
64
0
100%
21
43
35.5%
43
21
68.5%
22
42
37%
44
20
70%
X7 value
dB of
attenuation
Output
volume
00
76
0%
01
63
02
4-10
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
Command/response table for SIS commands (Cont’d)
Command
ASCII Command Response
(host to switcher)
(switcher to host)
Write global preset name
Example:
Esc X11 , X19 NG
Nmg X11 , X19
Nmg01,Security 1
Read global preset name
Esc X11 NG
Additional description
Names
Esc 1,Security
Example:
1NG
Esc 2NG
Write room name
Security 2
Esc X8 , X19 NR
Example:
Esc 1,Classrm
Read room name
Write room preset name
Example:
Nmr X8 , X19
1NR
Nmr01,Classrm 1
Esc X8 NR
Name room “Classrm 1”.
X19
Esc X8 * X12 , X19 NP
Nmp X8 * X12 , X19
Esc 1*3,Podium_DVDNP
Nmp01*03, X19
Esc X8 * X12 NP
Read room preset name
Name global preset 1 “Security 1”.
X19
Name room 1, preset 3
“Podium_DVD”.
X19
•
If a preset is unassigned, then
•
If a global preset is saved, but not yet named, the default name is Preset
•
If a room preset is saved, but not yet named, the default name is Rm X8 Prst X12 .
Write input name
Example:
Esc X1 , X19 NI
Read input name
Write output name
Example:
Esc X1 NI
Read output name
Esc X1 NO
Esc 1,Podium
X19
displays [unassigned].
X11
.
Nmi X1 , X19
camNI
Nmi01,Podium cam
Name input 1 “Podium cam”.
X19
Esc X1 , X19 NO
Esc 1,Main
Nmo X1 , X19
Nmo01,Main PJ1
PJ1NO
Name output 1 “Main PJ1”.
X19
I/O Grouping
Write input grouping
Example for CrossPoint 450 Plus 3232:
Esc X10 1 X10 2… X10 nI
Gri
X10 1 X10 2 X10 3… X10 n
Esc I40…33I
See below
Input 1 in group 4 Input 2 not grouped
Each X10 entry is the group
number assigned to an input
position, starting from input 1,
n is the maximum number of
inputs for this model.
Input 32 in group 3
Response #s = group: Gri 4 0 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 4 4 4 4 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 1 2 2 3 3 3 3
Input: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Input 1 - Group 4, Input 2 - Group
0 (not grouped),…Input 31 Group 3, Input 32 - Group 3.
Esc X10 1 X10 2… X10 n
O
Write output grouping
Gro X10 1 X10 2… X10 n
Read input grouping
Example for CrossPoint 450 Plus 2424:
Esc I
X10 1 X10 2 X10 3… X10 n
Esc I
See below
Input 1 in group 1
Input 9 not grouped
Each X10 entry is the group
number assigned to an output
position, starting from output 1,
n is the maximum number of
outputs for this model.
One X10 entry for each input,
starting from input 1, n is the
maximum number of inputs for
this model.
Input 24 in group 3
Response = group: 1 1 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 4 4 4 4 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 3 3 3 3
Input: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
4-11
Programmer’s Guide, cont’d
Command/response table for SIS commands (Cont’d)
Command
ASCII Command Response
(host to switcher)
(switcher to host)
Esc O
X10 1 X10 2 X10 3… X10 n
Additional description
I/O Grouping (Continued)
Read output grouping
One X10 entry for each output,
starting from input 1, n is the
maximum number of inputs for
this model.
The group that is assigned ( X10 ) must be 1, 2, 3, 4, or 0 (not grouped).
Save, recall, and directly write presets
•
If the user tries to recall a preset that is not saved, the matrix switcher responds with the
error code E11.
•
If the room is nonexistent, the matrix switcher responds with the error code E21.
•
The following characters are invalid in preset names:
+ ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
Save current ties as a global preset
Example:
Recall a global preset
Example:
Save current ties for a room
X11
9,
X11
5.
,
Spr X11
Spr09
Rpr X11
Rpr05
.
X8 * X12
,
3*9,
Example:
Rmm X8 •Spr X12
Rmm03•Spr09
Command character is a comma.
Save current ties as preset 9.
Command character is a period.
Recall preset 5, which becomes
the current configuration.
Command character is a comma.
Save current ties as preset 9 for
room 3.
Direct write process —
The direct write of a global preset should always be preceded by a clear global preset
command of that same preset number, as shown below. In a directly-written preset, each output
position’s tied input (or no tied input) remains unchanged unless overwritten or cleared.
If you do not clear a global preset number before you directly write a global preset to that
number, ties that are part of the previous version of the specified presets with the same number
can unexpectedly become part of the newly-created preset.
Clear a global preset
Directly write a global preset
Esc + X11 P0*!
Spr X11
Esc + X11 P X2 * X3 ! X2 * X3 % X2 * X3 $… X2 * X3 &
Spr X11
Example:
Esc +27P2*5!10*9$13*11%3*10&
Spr27
Write room outputs
Esc X8 , Y1 , Y2 ,... Yn MR
Mpr X8 , Y1 , Y2 ,... Yn
Example:
4-12
Clear all ties in preset number X11 .
The tie all (!), tie RGBHV (&),
tie video (%), and tie audio ($)
commands are all valid.
Brackets are shown to separate
ties for clarity only. Create global
preset 27, which ties video and
audio input 22 to output 5,
RGBHV input 15 to output 29,
video input 13 to output 26, and
audio input 3 to output 8.
See notes.
•
Each
•
A room can contain a maximum of 16 outputs.
•
An output can only belong to one room.
•
The maximum number of rooms ( X8 )is 10.
•
If no room name is assigned, the default name is “Room #X*•Y!,•Y@,•Y#”.
Y#
is an output
Esc 8,3,04,5,6MR
Mpr8,03,04,05,06
Outputs 3, 4, 5, and 6 are
assigned to room 8.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
Command/response table for SIS commands (Cont’d)
Command
ASCII Command Response
(host to switcher)
Additional description
(switcher to host)
Save, recall, and directly write presets (continued)
Read room outputs
Example:
Esc X8 MR
Esc 3MR
Recall a room preset
Directly write a room preset
X8 * X12
.
X19 , Y1 , Y2 , Yn
Class 1,01,02,08,09
Rmm X8 •Rpr X12
Esc + X8 * X12 P X2 * X3 ! X2 * X3 % X2 * X3 $… X2 * X3 &
Rmm X8 •Spr X12
Example:
Esc +7*3P12*7&13*35$4*26%6*6!
Rmm07•Spr03
Outputs 1, 2, 8, and 9 are
assigned to room 3, which is
named “Class 1”.
Command character is a period.
Enter as many ties as are valid
for this model. Tie all (!), tie
RGBHV (&), tie video (%), and
tie audio ($) commands are all
valid.
Brackets are shown to separate ties
for clarity only. Create preset 3
for room 7, which ties audio
input 12 to output 7, video input
13 to output 35, RGBHV input 4
to output 26, and video and
audio input 6 to output 6.
Lock (executive) modes
See “Setting the front panel locks (Executive modes)” in chapter 3, “Operation” for more
information on the Lock modes.
Lock all front panel functions
Lock advanced front panel functions
Unlock all front panel functions
View Lock mode
1X
2X
0X
X
Exe1
Exe2
Exe0
Enable Lock mode 1.
Enable Lock mode 2.
Enable Lock mode 0.
Reset global presets and names
Esc ZG
Zpg
Clear all global presets and their
names.
Reset an individual global preset
Reset RGB delays
Esc X11 ZG
Esc ZD
Zpg X11
Zpd
Reset audio input levels
Esc ZA
Zpa
Reset audio output levels
Esc ZV
Zpv
Reset all mutes
Esc ZZ
Zpz
Clear global preset X11 .
Reset all RGB delays to 0.0
seconds.
Reset all audio input levels (gain
and attenuation) to 0 dB.
Reset all audio output levels
(volume) to 100% (no attenuation).
Reset all video and audio mutes.
Reset room map
Reset individual room
Esc ZR
Esc X8 ZR
Zpr
Zpr X8
Clear all room presets.
Clear all presets for room
Reset individual room preset
Esc X8 * X12 ZP
Zpp X8 * X12
Reset flash
Esc ZFFF
Zpf
Clear individual room preset and
name.
Reset flash memory (erase usersupplied files).
Reset whole switcher
Esc ZXXX
Zpx
Absolute reset
Esc ZQQQ
Zpq
X9
Resets
X8 .
Clears all ties and presets, resets
all audio gains to 0 dB, and resets
volume to 100%.
Similar to Reset whole switcher,
plus clears IP address to
192.168.254.254 and subnet mask
to 255.255.0.0.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
4-13
Programmer’s Guide, cont’d
Command/response table for SIS commands (Cont’d)
Command
ASCII Command Response
(host to switcher)
Additional description
(switcher to host)
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and DSVP
View RGBHV output tie
Example:
X3 &
15&
View video output tie
Example:
View audio output tie
Example:
View input gain
Example:
View output volume
Example:
X3 %
7%
X3 $
3$
X2 G
4G
X2 V
7V
View output mutes
Esc VM
Example:
(CrossPoint 450 Plus 3232 HVA)
X2
27
Input 27 RGBHV tied to output
15.
X2
02
Input 2 video tied to output 7.
X2
06
Input 6 audio tied to output 3.
X4
-02
Gain for input #4 is -2 dB.
X7
55
Volume for output #7 is 55 steps
(9 dB of attenuation / 86.5% of
total volume).
Mut X14 1 X14 2... X14 n
Each X14 response is the mute
status of an output, starting from
output 1, n is the maximum
number of outputs for this
model.
Mut00001000000230000000000000000000
Output 5 video is muted, output
12 audio is muted, and output 13
video and audio are muted. All
other outputs are unmuted.
Esc VM
The MUT portion of the response appears only when the switcher is in Verbose mode 3. See the
Verbose mode command on page 4-19.
View video global preset configuration
Command description:
Response description:
Example:
Esc X11 * X3 *1VC
X2 1• X2 2• X2 3•...• X2 16 •Vid
Show preset X11 ’s video
configuration. Show the video
input tied to 16 sequential
outputs, starting from output X3 .
preset#*starting output# (StO#)*1(=video)VC
input # (I#) assigned to StO#•I# assigned to StO#+1...I# assigned to StO#+15•Vid
Esc 4*17*1VC
input 24 tied to output 19
no tied input
input 8 tied to output 29
Response = tied input: 08•08•24•08•08•29•29•00•08•01•01•01•08•08•08•08•Vid
Output: 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
The starting output # (StO#) should always be 1 for matrix sizes of 16 outputs or smaller.
Esc X11
* X3 *1VC
where
X11
= 0 returns the switcher’s current video configuration.
Each position shown in the response is an output: left = starting, right= starting output +15. The number in each position
is the input tied to that output.
Video — Input 1 is tied to outputs 26 through 28; input 8 to outputs 17, 18, 20,21, 25, and 29 through 32; input 24 to output
19; and input 29 to outputs 22 and 23. No input is tied to output 24.
4-14
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
Command/response table for SIS commands (Cont’d)
Command
ASCII Command Response
(host to switcher)
Additional description
(switcher to host)
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and DSVP (continued)
View audio global preset configuration
Esc X11 * X3 *2VC
X2 1• X2 2• X2 3•...• X2 16 •Aud
Show preset X11 ’s audio
configuration. Show the audio
input tied to 16 sequential
outputs, starting from output X3 .
Command description:
preset#*starting output# (StO#)*2(=audio)VC
Response description:
input # (I#) assigned to StO#•I# assigned to StO#+1...I# assigned to StO#+15•Aud
Example (CrossPoint 450 Plus 2412): Esc 0*1*2VC
input 1 tied to output 3
no tied input
no outputs
Response = tied input: 01•01•01•01•02•22•22•00•03•03•03•03•--•--•--•--•Aud
Output: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
The starting output # (StO#) should always be 1 for matrix sizes of 16 outputs or smaller.
Esc X11
* X3 *2VC
where
X11
= 0 returns the switcher’s current audio configuration.
Audio — Input 1 is tied to outputs 1 through 4, input 2 is tied to output 5, input 3 is tied to outputs 9 through 12, and
input 22 is tied to outputs 6 and 7. No input is tied to output 8. The switcher in this example is a
CrossPoint 450 Plus 2412, so outputs 13 through 16 are not present.
View video room preset configuration
Command description:
Response description:
Esc X8 * X12 *1*1VC
X2 • X2 1• X2 2•...• X2 15•Vid
Show room X8 , preset X11 ’s
video configuration. Show the
video input tied to up to 16
outputs, assigned to room X8 .
room#* room preset#*starting output# (StO#) (always 1)*1(=video)VC
input # (I#) assigned to StO#•I# assigned to StO#+1...I# assigned to StO#+15•Vid
The starting output # (StO#) should always be 1 for matrix sizes of 16 outputs or smaller.
View audio room preset configuration
Command description:
Response description:
Esc X8 * X12 *1*2VC
X2 • X2 1•...• X2 15•Aud
Show room X8 , preset X11 ’s
audio configuration. Show the
audio input tied to up to 16
outputs, assigned to room X8 .
room#* room preset#*starting output# (StO#) (always 1)*2(=audio)VC
input # (I#) assigned to StO#•I# assigned to StO#+1...I# assigned to StO#+15•Aud
The starting output # (StO#) should always be 1 for matrix sizes of 16 outputs or smaller.
The response to the View File Directory command differs, depending on whether the command
is sent via a serial port or Telnet connection or sent via a Web browser connection.
View file directory serial port and
Telnet
Esc DF
filename1,date/time,length
List user-supplied files.
filename2,date/time,length
filename3,date/time,length
•
•
•
•
filenamen,date/time,length
space_remaining Bytes•Left
View file directory Web browser
Esc DF
Var file = new array ();
List user-supplied files.
File [1] = ‘filename1,date1,filesize1’;
File [2] = ‘filename2,date2,filesize2’;
File [3] = ‘filename3,date3,filesize3’;
•
•
•
•
File[n] = ‘filenamen,daten,filesizen’;
File[n+1] = space_remaining Bytes•Left
Erase user-supplied Web pages/files
Esc filenameEF
Delfilename
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
4-15
Programmer’s Guide, cont’d
Command/response table for SIS commands (Cont’d)
Command
ASCII Command Response
(host to switcher)
Additional description
(switcher to host)
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and DSVP (continued)
View DSVP (sync frequency)
View connections
(CrossPoint 450 Plus only)
X1 LS
0LS
X15
, X15
X16 1 X16 2•...• X2 n
Each X16 response is the
connection status of an input,
starting from input 1, n is the
maximum number of inputs for
this model.
Information requests
Information request
Example:
I
I
V X2 X X3 •A X2 X X3
V32X16•A32X16
Request part number
Example:
N
N
xx-xxx-xx
60-468-01
V X2 X X3 = V size, A X2 X X3 = A Size.
32 video and 32 audio inputs by
16 video and 16 audio outputs
(CrossPoint 450 Plus 3216 HVA).
See appendix B for part #s.
CrossPoint 450 Plus 2424 HVA
part # is 60-468-01.
There are up to three separate sets of Extron firmware that the switcher can report on: the
CrossPoint/MAV Plus controller firmware, which is the overall control firmware; the Ethernet
protocol firmware, which handles the Ethernet interface; and the latest optional Extron firmware
update, which is available at www.Extron.com.
Query controller firmware version
Example:
Q
Q
X17
The factory-installed
CrossPoint/MAV Plus controller
firmware version is 1.23
(sample value only).
X17 - X18 - X18
Provide a detailed status of the
Query software version (verbose)
0Q
Ethernet protocol firmware, the
CrossPoint 450 Plus/MAV Plus
controller firmware, and any
firmware upgrade. The
firmware that is running is
marked by asterisk (*). A caret
(^) indicates that the firmware
has a bad checksum or an invalid
load. ?.?? indicates that firmware
is not loaded.
Response description: Ethernet protocol firmware version - controller firmware version - updated firmware version
Example:
1.23
0q
Description
* indicates the version running
Upload date and time
Response: 1.23-0.14(0.20-32x32 Series - , 00 2000 00:00:00 GMT)-0.25*(0.24-32x32 Series -Thu, 20 Mar 2003 16:39:21 GMT)
CrossPoint/MAV firmware version
Ethernet protocol
Updated firmware version
firmware
X20 • X20 • X20 • X20 • X20 • X20 • X20 • X21 • X22 • X22 • X9 • X9
Request system status
S
Response description: +5V•+3.3V•+2.5V•Fan voltage•-5V•-12V•+12V•Temp•Fan1 RPM•Fan2 RPM•Primary PS•Secondary PS
Example:
S
Fans receiving 11.52 V
Secondary power supply is on and Ok
4.98•3.30•2.55•11.52•-5.21•-12.35•11.65•78.80•753•774•1•1
5V power system at 4.98V
4-16
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
Fan 1 rotating at 753 RPM
Command/Response Table for IP SIS Commands
Symbol Definitions:
X30
= Matrix name
(Up to 240 characters)
The following characters are invalid in the name: {space} ~ , @ = , ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
X31
= Default name
Factory default name (model name + last 3 pairs of MAC address).
X32
= Time and date (set)
MM/DD/YY•HH:MM:SS where:
MM = month: 01 (January) through 12 (December)
DD = day: 01 through 31
YY = year: 00 through 99
HH = hour: 00 through 24
MM = minutes: 00 through 59
SS = seconds: 00 through 59
X33
= Time and date (read)
In the format: Day,•DD•Mmm•YYYY•HH:MM:SS where:
Day = weekday: Mon through Sun
DD = day: 01 through 31
Mmm = month: Jan through Dec
YYYY = year: 2000 through 2099
HH = hour: 00 through 24
MM = minutes: 00 through 59
SS = seconds: 00 through 59
X34
= GMT offset
–12.0 through +14.0. Hours and minutes removed from GMT
X35
= Daylight Savings Time
0 = Daylight Savings Time off/ignore
1 = Daylight Savings Time on (northern hemisphere)
2 = Daylight Savings Time on (Europe)
3 = Daylight Savings Time on (Brazil)
X36
= IP address
###.###.###.###
X37
= Hardware (MAC) address
##-##-##-##-##-##
X38
= Number of open connections 0 - 255
X39
= Password
X40
= Domain name
12 digits, alphanumeric
The following characters are invalid in passwords: {space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
Standard domain name conventions apply (for example, xxx.com)
The following characters are invalid in a domain name: {space} + ~ , = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and
?. The @ character is only acceptable as the lead-in to the domain name (such as @extron.com).
X41
= E-mail account
65 – 72. 65 = e-mail recipient #1, 66 = 2, 67 = 3, ..., 72 = recipient #8
X42
= E-mail address
Typical e-mail address format (for example: nnnnn@xxx.com)
X43
= Notify when?
0 = No response, 1 = fail/missing, 2 = fixed/restored, 3 = both 1 & 2
X44
= Notification selections
Matrix size 2412 and larger:
X45
= Notify status (for read)
01 – 32 = input 1 through input 32
98 = power supplies
99 = fans
Matrix size 1616 and smaller: 01 – 16 = input 1 through input 16
17 = power supply
34- or 17-digit number. For each digit: 0 = do not notify, 1 = notify
X46
= DHCP
(0 = off, 1 = on)
X47
= Port #
00 – 99 (00 = all ports)
X48
= Baud rate
9600, 19200, 38400, 115200
X49
= Parity
Odd, even, none, mark, space (only first letter required)
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
4-17
Programmer’s Guide, cont’d
X50
= Data bits
7, 8
X51
= Stop bits
1, 2
X52
= Port type
0 = RS-232, 1 = RS-422, 2 = RS-485
X53
= Verbose mode
0 = Clear/none (default for Telnet connection)
1 = Verbose mode (default for RS-232/RS-422 connection)
2 = Tagged responses for queries
3 = Verbose mode and tagged for queries
If tagged responses is enabled, all read commands return the constant string and the value as the
set command does (for example, the read matrix name command, Esc CN , returns Ipn• X30 ).
X54
= RAM status
0 = RAM dirty (needs saving to flash)
1 = RAM has been saved (ok to power off/reset)
Command/response table for IP SIS commands
Command
ASCII Command
Response
(host to switcher)
(switcher to host)
Additional description
IP setup commands
Set matrix name (location)
Read matrix name (location)
Reset matrix name to factory default
Set time and date
Read time and date
Esc X30 CN
Ipn• X30
Esc CT
X33
Set GMT offset
Esc X34 CZ
Ipz X34
Esc CN
X30
Esc •CN
Ipn• X31
Ipt X32
Esc X32 CT
Read GMT offset
Esc CZ
X34
Set Daylight Savings Time
Esc X35 CX
Ipx X35
Read Daylight Savings Time
Set IP address
Read IP address
Read hardware address
Read # of open connections
Set subnet mask
Read subnet mask
Set gateway IP address
Read gateway IP address
Set administrator password
Read administrator password
Reset (clear) administrator password
Set user password
Read user password
Reset (clear) user password
Set mail server, domain name
Esc CX
X35
Esc X36 CI
Ipi X36
Read mail server, domain name
Esc CM
Set e-mail recipient
Esc X41 , X42 CR
Example
Read e-mail recipient
4-18
Esc CI
Esc CH
Esc CC
Esc X36 CS
Esc CS
Esc X36 CG
Esc CG
Esc X39 CA
Esc CA
Esc •CA
Esc X39 CU
Esc CU
Esc •CU
Esc X36 , X40 , X39 CM
The divider between hours and
minutes is a period.
Set the switcher to display the
local time as Daylight Savings
Time (+1 hour) in summer
months.
X36
X37
Icc X38
Ips X36
X36
Ipg X36
X36
Ipa• X39
X39
Ipa• X30
Ipu X39
X39
Ipu• X30
Ipm X36 , X40 , X39
X36 , X40 , X39
Ipr X42 ,
Esc 72,JSmith@folklore.netCR
This command sets the recipient.
To receive e-mail notifications,
you must then set the events that
the switcher reports using one or
more separate Set e-mail events
(EM) commands (see next page).
Ipr•JSmith@folklore.net,
Esc X41 CR
Ipr X42 , X44 ,
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
Command/response table for IP SIS commands (continued)
Command
ASCII Command
Response
(host to switcher)
(switcher to host)
Additional description
IP setup commands (continued)
Set e-mail events for recipient
Esc X41 , X43 , X44 , X44 ,
..., X44 EM
Ipe X45
You must first have set an e-mail
recipient for the e-mail account
number( X41 ), using the separate
Set e-mail recipient (CR) command.
Example for CrossPoint 450 Plus 3232:
Esc 72,3,1,2,8,32,98,99EM
Ipr•JSmith@folklore.net,
E-mail account #72, JSmith, will
receive fail/missing and fixed/
restored messages for input
signals 1,2,8,and 32; fans; and
power supplies.
Esc X41 EM
X44 , X44 , X44 ..., X44
Read e-mail events for recipient
Response description:
Notify-what?, inputs 1-32 (inputs above the matrix size are always 0) fans PS
Esc 72EM
Example for CrossPoint 450 Plus 3232:
See below
Notify failed and fixed
E-mail input 8 status
Ignore input 16
E-mail power supply and fan status
Response: 3, 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
Input: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Fans
Power Supplies
Example for MAV Plus 1616:
Esc 72EM
See below
Notify failed and fixed
E-mail input 8 status
Ignore input 16
Response: 3, 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Input: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Power Supply
Set DHCP on or off
Read DHCP status
Set serial port parameters
Esc X46 DH
Read serial port parameters
Set mode
Read mode
Set verbose mode
Read verbose mode
Esc X47 CP
Esc DH
Idh X46
X46
Esc X47 * X48 , X49 , X50 , X51 CP
Esc X47 * X52 CY
Esc X47 CY
Cpn X47 •Cty X48 , X49 , X50 , X51
X48 , X49 , X50 , X51
Cpn X47 •Cty X52
X52
Esc X53 CV
Vrb X53
Esc CV
X53
Special Characters
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The switcher
will not accept these characters as part of preset names, the switcher’s name,
passwords, or locally created file names.
The switcher rejects the following characters:
{space (spaces are ok for names)} + } ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ semicolon (;)
colon (:) | \ and ?.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
4-19
Programmer’s Guide, cont’d
This page was intentionally left blank.
4-20
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Programmer’s Guide
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers
5
Chapter Five
Matrix Software
Matrix Switchers Control Program
Special Characters
Button-Label Generator
Matrix Software,
cont’d
Matrix
Software
Matrix Switchers Control Program
The Windows-based Extron Matrix Switchers Control Program, which
communicates with the switcher via the rear panel Remote RS-232/RS-422 port, the
front panel Configuration (RS-232) port (matrix sizes up to 1616), and the LAN
port, provides an easy way to set up ties and sets of ties. The program is
compatible with Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
Installing the software
The program is contained on the Extron Software Products CD-ROM, disk B.
Install the software as follows:
For full functionality, install both of the following programs:
1.
•
The Matrix Switchers Control Program
•
The Firmware Loader
Insert the CD-ROM into the drive. The installation program should start
automatically. If it does not self-start, run Launch.exe from the CD.
The Extron software CD window appears (figure 5-1).
Figure 5-1 — Software CD window
2.
Click the Software tab (figure 5-1).
3.
Scroll to the desired program and click Install (figure 5-2).
Figure 5-2 — Software installation
5-2
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
Follow the on-screen instructions. By default, the Windows installation of the
Matrix Switchers Control Program creates a C:\Program Files\Extron\
Matrix_Switcher directory, and it places three icons into a group folder named
“Extron Electronics\Matrix Switchers.” The three installed icons are:
4.
•
MATRIX Switcher+ Control Program
•
MATRIX Switcher+ Help
•
Uninstall MATRIX Switcher
The CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher can support remote control
via either the rear panel Remote RS-232/RS-422 port or the front panel
Configuration port (matrix sizes up to 1616).
Remote RS-232/RS-422 port — The port can be configured for either the
RS-232 or RS-422 serial communication protocol and operate at the 9600,
19200, 38400, or 115200 baud rate. See “Selecting the rear panel Remote port
protocol and baud rate” in chapter 3, “Operation”, to configure the rear panel
port from the front panel.
Configuration port (matrix sizes up to 1616 only) — The port supports
RS-232 serial communication protocol only. The port can operate at the 9600,
19200, 38400, or 115200 baud rate, but Extron recommends leaving this
port at the 9600 baud rate. See the Set serial port parameters command on
page 4-19 to configure either port using an SIS command.
Software operation via Ethernet
When a CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher is connected to an Ethernet
WAN or LAN, any number of users can operate it, locally or remotely, using the
Matrix Switchers Control Program. See “Ethernet connection” in chapter 2,
“Installation”, for installation details.
Connection to the switcher via the Ethernet is password protected. There are two
levels of password protection: administrator and user. Administrators have full
access to all CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switching capabilities and editing
functions. Users can select inputs and outputs, set and recall presets, and view all
settings with the exception of passwords. If the same password or no password is
required for logging on, all personnel log on with administrator privileges. Fields
and functions that exceed user privileges are grayed out in the Matrix Switchers
Control Program when the operator is logged on as a user.
Ethernet protocol settings
The IP Settings/Options screen (figure 5-7 on page 5-7) provides a location for
viewing and, if connected via a serial port or if logged on via the Ethernet port as
an administrator, editing settings unique to the Ethernet interface. See
“IP Settings/Options window” later in this chapter for more details.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-3
Matrix Software, cont’d
Using the software
Many items found in the Matrix Switchers Control Program are also accessible via
front panel controls (see chapter 3, “Operation”) and under SIS control (see chapter
4, “Programmer’s Guide”). The Matrix Switchers Help Program provides
information on settings and on how to use the control program itself.
1.
To run the Matrix Switchers Control Program, double-click
on the Matrix Switchers Control Program icon (shown at
right) in the Extron Electronics group or folder.
The Comm Port Selection window (figure 5-3) appears.
Figure 5-3 — Comm port selection window
2.
Choose either the comm port that is connected to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher’s serial port, IP [LAN], or Emulate.

If you selected a comm port, check the baud rate displayed in the comm
port selection window. If you need to change the baud rate, click on the
Baud button and double-click on the desired baud rate.
Available rates are 9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200. The default is 9600.
Click Ok and proceed to step 4.
3.

If you selected IP [LAN], click Ok and proceed to step 3.

If you selected Emulate, click Ok and see “Using emulation mode” on
page 5-22.
If you selected IP [LAN] in step 2, the IP Connection window appears
(figure 5-4).
Figure 5-4 — Address and password entry
5-4
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
a.
Examine the Extron IP Address field in the IP Connection window. The
field displays the last Extron IP address entered.
If the IP address is correct: Proceed to step 3b.
If the address is not correct: Either click in the Extron IP Address field
and enter the IP address or click on the scroll down button ( ) and select
from among the recently used addresses. Proceed to step 3b.
If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the factoryspecified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.
b.
If the switcher is password protected, click in the Password field and
enter the enter the appropriate administrator or user password.
c.
Click Connect.
If you logged on using the administrator password, the Windows
program connects you to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher
with all of the administrator rights and privileges.
If you logged on using the user password, the Windows program
connects you to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher with only
user capabilities.
If an incorrect password was entered, the program beeps and returns to
the password entry display.
4.
The Extron Matrix Switchers Control Program window (figure 5-5 and
figure 5-6) appears. The window displays the current configuration of the
attached matrix.
Figure 5-5 — Extron Matrix Switchers Control Program window (blank)
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-5
Matrix Software, cont’d
Figure 5-6 — Sample program window (complete)
5-6
•
To set up audio in follow mode (audio and video have the same tie
configuration), select the Follow box at the bottom of the window. To set up
audio in breakaway mode (audio and video have different tie configurations),
deselect the Follow box.
•
To make the control program easier to use, assign a device icon to each input
and output. Click on a box that represents an input or output, and drag the
desired icon onto the box from the icon palette that appears.
•
To create a tie, drag an input box to one or more output boxes. To remove a
tie, drag the output box to its tied input box or to the trash can.
•
For quick display of information on a specific input or output device, position
the cursor over that device in the control program window. The program
opens a window that details the connections to that device, the audio level,
and, for CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only, the switching interval (RGB
delay) and the frequency of the video signal input from or output to that
device. See the inset box in figure 5-6.
•
If desired, on the task bar, click on Tools > IP Options to set the switcher’s IP
parameters in the IP Settings/Options window (figure 5-7).
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
IP Settings/Options window
The IP Settings/Options window (figure 5-7) provides a location for viewing and,
if connected via either serial port or if logged on via the Ethernet port as an
administrator, editing settings unique to the Ethernet interface. See appendix A,
“Ethernet Connection”, for basic information about IP addresses. None of the
fields on this screen can be edited while you are logged on as a user.
Figure 5-7 — Control program IP setting/options window
Editing variables on the IP Settings/Options screen while connected via the
Ethernet port can immediately disconnect the user from the switcher. Extron
recommends editing the settings on this screen using a serial port and
protecting the Ethernet access to this screen by assigning an administrator’s
password to qualified and knowledgeable personnel only.
When the control program is connected to the switcher via a serial port, the
Administrator and User Password fields are not masked. If a password has
been inadvertently changed to an unknown value, you can look up and, if
desired, change a password in this window without knowing the current
password.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-7
Matrix Software, cont’d
Matrix IP Address field
The Matrix IP Address field contains the IP address of the connected matrix
switcher. This value is encoded in the flash memory in the switcher.
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields separated by
dots (periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes,
up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.
The default address is 192.168.254.254, but if this conflicts with other equipment at
your installation, you can change the IP address to any valid value.
Editing the Extron IP address while connected via the Ethernet port can
immediately disconnect the user from the matrix switcher. Extron
recommends editing this field using a serial port and protecting the Ethernet
access to this screen by assigning an administrator’s password to qualified and
knowledgeable personnel only.
Edit this field as follows:
1.
Click in the Matrix IP address field. The graphic cursor becomes a text cursor.
2.
Edit the address as desired.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the Matrix IP
Address field.
4.
Click on the Take button to make the address change take affect.
Extron Name/Descriptor field
The Extron Name/Descriptor field contains the name used as the “from”
information when the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher e-mails
notification of its failed or repaired status. This descriptor can be changed to any
valid name, up to 12 alphanumeric characters.
The following characters are invalid in the Extron Name/Descriptor field:
{space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
Edit this field as follows:
5-8
1.
Click in the Extron name/descriptor field. The graphic cursor becomes a text
cursor.
2.
Edit the name as desired.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the Extron
Name/Descriptor field.
4.
Click on the Take button to make the name change take effect.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
Gateway IP address field
The Gateway IP Address field identifies the address of the gateway to the mail
server to be used if the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher and the mail
server are not on the same subnet.
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields separated by
dots (periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes,
up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.
Edit this field as follows:
1.
Click in the Gateway IP Address field. The graphic cursor becomes a text
cursor.
2.
Edit the address as desired.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the Gateway
IP Address field.
4.
Click the Take button to make the address change take affect.
Subnet Mask field
The Subnet Mask field is used to determine whether the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher is on the same subnet as the controlling PC or the mail server
when you are subnetting. For more information, see “Subnetting — A Primer”, in
Appendix A, “Ethernet Connection”.
Edit this field as follows:
1.
Click in the Subnet Mask field. The graphic cursor becomes a text cursor.
2.
Edit the mask as desired.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the Subnet
Mask field.
4.
Click the Take button to make the mask take affect.
Hardware Address field
The hardware address is hardcoded in the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus
switcher and cannot be changed.
Use DHCP checkbox
The Use DHCP checkbox directs the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher to
ignore any entered IP addresses and to obtain its IP address from a Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server (if the network is DHCP capable). Contact
the local system administrator.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-9
Matrix Software, cont’d
Date field
The Date field displays the current date in the Greenwich Mean Time zone. If
necessary, adjust the date as follows:
1.
Click in the Date field. A set date field appears with
the date in the format (M)M/(D)D/YYYY. Leading
zeroes are not used. The graphic cursor becomes a text cursor in the set date
field.
2.
Edit the field as desired to set the proper date. Leading zeroes are optional.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the set date
field.
4.
Click the Take button to make the date change take affect.
Time (local) field
The Time (local) field displays the current time in the local time zone. If necessary,
click on the Sync Time to PC button to set the switcher to your computer’s internal
time or else adjust the time manually as follows:
1.
Click in the time field. A set time field appears with
the date in the format HH:MM:SS
(00:00:00 to 23:59:59). The graphic cursor becomes a text cursor in the set time
field.
2.
Edit the field as desired to set the proper time. Remember to use 24-hour
time. Leading zeroes are optional.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the set time
field.
4.
Click the Take button to make the time change take affect.
Sync Time to PC button
Clicking the mouse on the Sync Time to PC button causes the computer you are
operating to send its internal time to the switcher in a set time command.
GMT (offset) field
The GMT field displays the amount of time, in hours and minutes, that the local
time varies from the GMT international time reference. If necessary, adjust the
offset as follows:
5-10
1.
Click in the GMT field. A set offset field appears with the offset in
the format ±HH:MM (–12:00 to +14:00). The graphic cursor
becomes a text cursor in the set offset field.
2.
Edit the field as desired to set the proper offset. Leading zeroes are optional.
Some time zones are on the half-hour (30 minutes).
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the Set
Offset field.
4.
Click the Take button to make the offset change take affect.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
Use Daylight Savings checkbox
Click in the Use Daylight Savings checkbox. When Daylight Savings Time is
turned on, the switcher automatically updates its internal clock between Standard
Time and Daylight Savings Time in the spring and fall on the date that the time
change occurs in the country or region selected. When Daylight Savings Time is
turned off, the switcher does not adjust its time reference.
Administrator Password field
The Administrator Password field displays the password required to log on to the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher via the Ethernet port with all of the administrator’s
rights and privileges. Passwords are case sensitive and are limited to 12 upper case
and lower case alphanumeric characters.
While you are logged on as a user, this field is masked with asterisks (************)
as a security measure.
Editing the Administrator Password field while connected via the Ethernet
port can immediately disconnect the user from the switcher. Extron
recommends editing this field using a serial port and protecting the Ethernet
access to this screen by assigning an administrator’s password to qualified and
knowledgeable personnel only.
The following characters are invalid in passwords: {space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ]
{ } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
Edit this field as follows:
1.
Click in the Administrator Password field. The graphic cursor becomes a text
cursor.
2.
Edit the case-sensitive password as desired.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the
Administrator Password field.
4.
Click the Take button to make the password change take affect.
User Password field
The User Password field displays the password required to log on to the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher via the Ethernet port as a user, without
all of the administrator’s rights and privileges. Passwords are case sensitive and
are limited to 12 upper case and lower case alphanumeric characters.
While you are logged on as a user, this field is masked with asterisks (************)
as a security measure.
An administrator password must be created before a user password can be
created.
The following characters are invalid in passwords: {space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ]
{ } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
Edit this field as follows:
1.
Click in the User Password field. The graphic cursor becomes a text cursor.
2.
Edit the case-sensitive password as desired.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the User
Password field.
4.
Click the Take button to make the password change take affect.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-11
Matrix Software, cont’d
Mail Server IP Address field
The Mail Server IP Address field displays the IP address of the mail server that
handles the e-mail for the facility in which the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus
switcher is installed.
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields separated by
dots (periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes,
up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.
Edit this field as follows:
1.
Click in the mail server IP address field. The graphic cursor becomes a text
cursor.
2.
Edit the IP address as desired.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the mail
server IP address field.
4.
Click the Take button to make the address change take affect.
Mail Server Domain Name field
The Mail Server Domain Name field displays the domain name that the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher uses to log on to the e-mail server.
Standard domain conventions (such as nnnnn@xxx.com) apply.
The following characters are invalid in a domain name: {space} + ~ , = ‘ [ ]
{ } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?. The @ character is only acceptable as the lead-in
to the domain name (such as @folklore.net).
Edit this field as follows:
1.
Click in the Mail Server Domain Name field. The graphic cursor becomes a
text cursor.
2.
Edit the name as desired.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the Mail
Server Domain Name field.
4.
Click the Take button to make the name change take affect.
E-mail Addressee fields
The eight E-mail Addressee fields permit the administrator to identify the e-mail
addresses of the personnel to whom the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher
e-mails notification of its failure and repair status. Figure 5-8 shows a typical e-mail
from the switcher.
Figure 5-8— Typical CrossPoint 450 Plus e-mail
5-12
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
The radio buttons and check boxes associated with each address field permit the
administrator to specify specific e-mail requirements for each recipient.
Edit these fields and controls as follows:
1.
Click in the desired E-mail Addressee field. The graphic cursor becomes a
text cursor.
2.
Edit the e-mail address as desired. Standard e-mail address conventions
(for example: nnnnn@xxx.com) apply.
3.
Press the Tab key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the e-mail
addressee field.
4.
In the square check boxes associated with each addressee, select the options
about which the addressee is to be e-mailed: missing input(s), fans, and/or
power supply. In the floating box that contains the input numbers, select the
inputs that need monitoring.
5.
In the round radio buttons associated with each addressee, select whether the
addressee is to be e-mailed of failures, fixes, both, or not be notified.
The None radio button is useful for temporarily removing personnel from the
e-mail list when they are unavailable, such as on travel or vacation.
6.
If desired, click on the Send test E-mail button to test the e-mail function.
7.
Click on the Take button to make the e-mail address changes take affect.
Update firmware
The firmware upgrade utility provides a way to replace the firmware that is coded
on the switcher’s control board without taking the switcher out of service.
The Firmware Loader must be installed on your computer to perform this
operation. Extron recommends that you install this program when you install
the Matrix Switchers Control Program. If you did not, it can be downloaded
from the Extron Web site, www.extron.com, and installed separately.
The update firmware utility is for replacing the firmware that controls all
switcher operation. This is not the page to insert your own HTML pages.
See “Upload HTML files” to insert custom HTML pages.
Update the switcher firmware as follows:
1.
Visit the Extron web site, www.extron.com, click the Download Center tab,
and then click the Firmware link (figure 5-9). Select the appropriate firmware
file to download and copy it to your computer. Note the folder to which you
save the firmware file.
Figure 5-9 — Location of firmware upgrade files
2.
In the Windows Explorer or other file browser, double-click the downloaded
executable (*.exe) file) to self-extract the firmware file.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-13
Matrix Software, cont’d
3.
Connect a Windows-based computer to either switcher serial port or the
switcher LAN port. See chapter 2, “Installation”, for more details.
4.
Start the Matrix Switchers Control Program. See “Using the software” in this
chapter, steps 1 through 4, starting on page 5-4.
The Ethernet connection is much faster than the serial port connections.
Extron recommends using the Ethernet connection rather than the serial port
for firmware uploads.
5.
Click Tools > Update firmware.
If you are connected via the LAN port, the select file window appears
(figure 5-10). See “Ethernet-connected firmware upload”, below.
If you are connected via either serial port, the Extron Firmware Loader
appears (figure 5-11). See “Serial-port-connected firmware upload”, on
page 5-15.
Ethernet-connected firmware upload
Figure 5-10 — Select file window
6.
Navigate to the folder where you saved the firmware upgrade file. Select the
file.
Valid firmware files must have the file extension .S19. Any other file extension
is not a firmware upgrade.
The original factory-installed firmware is permanently available on the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher. If the attempted firmware upload
fails for any reason, the switcher reverts to the factory-installed firmware.
7.
Click the Open button. The software advises you that you are about to
reprogram the switcher’s firmware. Click Ok to continue.
A status window, which shows the progress of the
upload, appears. The firmware upload to the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher may
take a few minutes.
5-14
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
Serial-port-connected firmware upload
Figure 5-11 — Firmware loading
6.
Click Browse. The open file window appears.
7.
Navigate to the folder where you saved the firmware upgrade file. Select the
file and click Open. The Firmware Loader returns to the top.
Valid firmware files must have the file extension “.S19”. Any other file
extension is not a firmware upgrade for your matrix switcher.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-15
Matrix Software, cont’d
8.
Click Upload. The File Loader advises you that using the Ethernet (LAN) port
is preferred over using either serial port (figure 5-12).
Figure 5-12 — Confirm window
To quit the firmware upload and start over using the LAN port, click the
Cancel button and return to step 3. Use the LAN port connection in step 3.
To continue the firmware upload using either serial port connection, click
the Ok button. The program prompts you to identify the serial port to which
you are connected. Continue to step 9.
9.
If necessary, change the port number in the device port field:
•
Rear panel RS-232/RS-422 port, enter 1.
•
Front panel Configuration port, enter 2.
Click the Ok button. The Firmware Loader reports, “This process could take
several minutes. Please wait...”, then displays a status bar that shows the
progress of the upload. When the upload is complete, the Firmware Loader
reports “Unit resetting, this can take some time, please wait. ...“, and then
“Transfer complete!“.
Firmware upgrades using either serial port can take several minutes.
10.
5-16
When the Firmware Loader reports, “Transfer complete!”, click the Exit button
on the Firmware Loader and then again on the port configuration window.
The Firmware Loader and the Matrix Switchers Control Program exit.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
Upload HTML files
You can create customized HTML pages for the switcher to display. The HTML
Files List window (figure 5-13) provides a way to view the contents of the
switcher’s file system and upload custom HTML pages to the switcher.
Figure 5-13 — HTML Files List window
Upload HTML pages as follows:
The files listed in figure 5-13 are shown for example only and may not be
present on your switcher.
The HTML Files List window is for inserting your own HTML pages. This is
not the window to replace the firmware that controls all switcher operation.
See Update firmware in this chapter to replace the firmware.
The following characters are invalid in file names: {space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] {
} < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
1.
Connect the PC to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher via the
switcher’s serial port or Ethernet port.
2.
Start the Matrix Switchers Control Program and connect to the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher. See “Using the software” in this
chapter, steps 1 through 4, starting on page 5-4.
3.
Click on Tools > HTML File Manager.
4.
Click on the Pick File(s) to Load to Server button. An open file window appears.
5.
Navigate to the folder where you saved the HTML file(s). Select the file(s).
To select multiple files, hold the Ctrl key while you select the desired files.
If you want one of the HTML files that you created to be the default start-up
page, name the file “index.html”. The CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus
switcher automatically looks for that file name when you first connect to it
using an Internet browser.
6.
Click on the Open button. The file(s) upload to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher may take a few minutes.
7.
Click on the Update button to confirm the upload.
8.
Click on the Close button to exit the HTML Files List window.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-17
Matrix Software, cont’d
Windows buttons, drop boxes, and trash
The buttons, drop boxes, and trash can on the right side of the program window
perform the following functions:
Power — Unavailable for CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus
switchers, because the switcher power cannot be controlled via
software.
Executive mode — Allows you to lock out front panel operations,
except for the view-only mode functions. Click the button to
cycle between Lock mode 0 (the indicator displays white),
Lock mode 1 (the indicator displays red), and Lock mode 2 (the
indicator displays orange).
See “Setting the front panel locks (Executive modes)” in
chapter 3, “Operation” for more information on the Lock modes.
Room menu — Displays a list of up to 10 rooms. You can select a
room from the list to display it in the window.
A Room is a subset of outputs that are logically related to each
other, as determined by the operator. The CrossPoint 450 Plus
or MAV Plus switcher supports up to 10 rooms, each of which
can consist of from 1 to 16 outputs.
Presets menu — Displays a list of up to 32 global presets and up to
100 room presets (10 rooms x 10 presets per room). You can
select a preset from the list to display it in the window and
either activate it (Go) or delete it (Delete).
Go — Activates the selected preset as the current configuration.
Save as — Allows the current set of ties to be saved as a preset. Enter
the preset number when prompted to do so.
Delete — Allows the current preset to be deleted.
Changes – Take — Allows you to save to file any changes made to the
displayed configuration.
Changes – Cancel — Returns to the previous screen, undoing any
changes you have made.
Trash can — Drag and drop from an input or output button to the
trash can to unmake all ties associated with that input or output.
5-18
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
Windows menus
File menu
Save matrix settings as — Saves a complete set of up to 32
presets, plus the last active setting (preset #0), to a
file. Saved settings include audio gain settings (if
specified), assigned icons, and icon captions.
Restore matrix settings from — Loads and activates a previously saved setting file.
Save this-session’s settings — Saves the current assigned icons and icon captions.
Restore last-session’s settings — Loads the icons and icon captions that were
saved during the last session. If you saved the previous session’s changes to
disk the last time you exited the program, the ties from that session are also
loaded.
Select printer — Selects the target printer.
Print tie map — Prints the tie set that is displayed on the screen.
Exit — Closes the MATRIX Switcher+ Control Program.
Tools menu
Assign device icons — Displays the complete set of input
and output device icons. You can drag any of these
icons to the input and output boxes.
Edit device palette — Allows you to add your own device
icon graphics.
RGB delay settings — Displays the switching interval
setting for each input and allows you to change them.
Audio-Input gain settings — Displays the audio gain level
setting for a single input or for all inputs and allows
you to change it. The level is expressed as the
magnitude (number of decibels) and polarity (positive,
gain or negative, attenuation) of the audio adjustment.
Audio-Output volume settings — Displays the audio
output level setting for a single input or for all inputs and allows you to
change it. The level is expressed as a percentage of the input audio volume
that is applied to the output; 0% is full attenuation (audio is silent), 100% is
full volume.
Mute-Output settings — Displays the RGB Delay, Volume, and Mute Adjust
screen, which allows you to mute and unmute individual or all video and
audio outputs.
View input frequencies — (DSVP) Displays the input horizontal and vertical
frequencies for each input.
Update firmware — Allows you to replace the firmware that is coded on the
switcher’s control board without taking the switcher out of service, opening
the switcher enclosure, and replacing the firmware chip set. See “Update
firmware” on page 5-13.
IP options — Allows you to set IP options. See “IP Settings/Options window” on
page 5-7.
HTML file manager — Displays a list of HTML files installed on the switcher and
allows you to upload custom files from a connected PC to the switcher. See
“Upload HTML files” on page 5-17.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-19
Matrix Software, cont’d
Hardware status — Provides an overall view of the status of the matrix switcher,
including the primary and secondary power supply status and the individual
voltages, the fan and temperature status, the Remote RS-232/RS-422 port
configuration, and the installed and updated firmware status (figure 5-14).
Figure 5-14 — Status window
Green — Proper operation.
Red — Component has failed.
White — Components are not installed.
The CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus switchers are not available in custom
configurations. Each model has all available monitored components, such as
power supplies and fans, installed. If you see the white “not installed”
indication, the “not installed” component probably became disconnected
during shipment or rough handling.
Smaller switchers (16 x 16 matrix sizes and smaller) do not show the power
supply and fan status blocks.
Name presets — Allows you to assign a name to each of the 32 memory presets.
Preset names are limited to 12 uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric
characters, space, and the _ and / characters.
The following characters are invalid in preset names:
+ ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
Show RS-232 strings — Displays the ASCII commands that are used by the current
configuration. You can refer to these for SIS command programming.
I/O group settings — Allows you to establish I/O groups.
Room configuration — Allows you to assign outputs to rooms or delete outputs
from rooms.
A Room is a subset of outputs that are logically related to each other, as
determined by the operator. The CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher
supports up to 10 rooms, each of which can consist of from 1 to 16 outputs.
Initialize — Initializes and clears any or all of the following: ties, presets, audio
configuration, preset names, icon names, and icons.
5-20
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
Preferences menu
Immediate changes — Causes configuration changes to take
effect immediately.
Hold/verify changes — Delays implementation of
configuration changes until the Changes – Take button
is pressed.
Ties as lines — Displays ties as lines (figure 5-15).
Figure 5-15 — Ties shown as lines
Ties as crosspoints — Displays ties as a matrix of inputs and outputs (figure 5-16).
Ties that have been made are indicated as amber (video and audio), green
(video only), and red (audio only) boxes. Ties that will take effect when you
click on the Take button are indicated by +. Ties that will be broken when you
click on the Take button are indicated by –.
Figure 5-16 — Ties shown as crosspoints
Frequency read options (CrossPoint 450 Plus only) — Allows you to set the input
signal detection (DSVP) feature as follows:
•
To never sample and display the sync or no sync status
(set this option to None)
•
To automatically refresh the display
(set this option to Automatically every 10 seconds)
•
To sample the sync and update the display whenever you make a
configuration change (set this option to On demand or by refresh).
Limit ties to same group — Allows you to limit the creation of ties using the
program to inputs and outputs that are in the same group (similar to front
panel operation).
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-21
Matrix Software, cont’d
Icons in I/O boxes — Erases any numbers in the I/O boxes in the Control
Program window (figure 5-6). You can place icons in the boxes.
Numbers in I/O boxes — Erases any icons in the I/O boxes in the
Control Program window and fills each box with the associated
input or output number.
Catch FPC/others changes — When checked, sets the switcher to report all
configuration and setting changes to the serial port or Ethernet connection
that turned this selection on. These reports allow the Matrix Switchers
Control Program to track the changes that occur in the switcher’s
configuration and settings, whether commanded via the front panel, the
either serial port, or the Ethernet port.
Master-Reset selection
Master reset clears all ties and presets, all video and audio mutes, resets all I/O
grouping, sets all input audio levels to unity gain (+0 dB), and sets all output
volume levels to 100% (0 dB of attenuation).
Master reset does not reset the Internet protocol (IP) settings.
Using emulation mode
Emulation mode allows you to set up the software without attaching the switcher
to the computer. To use emulation mode, do the following:
1.
Double-click the MATRIX Switchers+ Control Program icon in the Extron
Electronics group or folder.
2.
Choose Emulate, and click Ok.
3.
Choose an emulation file to open, and click on Ok. The file DEMO.MTX
provides a sample of a completed matrix setup. Selecting the file NEW.INI or
clicking Cancel provides a blank setup to get you started.
4.
Enter the file name under which you want to save any changes to the file, and
click Ok.
5.
Select the number of video boards, audio boards, and matrix model for which
you are preparing a configuration, and click Ok.
6.
Continue using the program as described on page 5-6.
Using the help system
For information about program features, you can access the help program in any of
the following ways:
•
From the Extron Electronics program folder or group, double-click
on the MATRIX Switcher+ Help icon (shown at right).
•
From within the Matrix Switcher Control Program, click on the
Help menu on the main screen.
•
From within the Matrix Switcher Control Program, press the F1 key.
Special Characters
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The switcher
will not accept these characters as part of preset names, the switcher’s name,
passwords, or locally created file names.
The switcher rejects the following characters:
{space (spaces are ok for names)} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ semicolon (;)
colon (:) | \ and ?.
5-22
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
Button-Label Generator
The Button Label Generator software creates labels that you can place in the
translucent covers of the input select buttons. You can create labels with names,
alphanumeric characters, or even color bitmaps for easy and intuitive input and
output selection. See appendix B, “Reference Information”, for the procedure for
removing and replacing the translucent covers.
The Extron Button Label Generator is available on the Extron Web site,
www.extron.com, under the Download Center tab. Click the Software link
(figure 5-17), and download and install the program.
Figure 5-17 — Location of Software on the web site.
The Button Label Generator software is also included on the Extron Software
Products CD-ROM that accompanied the switcher.
By default, the Windows installation creates a C:\Program
Files\Extron\ButtonLabelGenerator directory and places the Button Label
Generator icon into a group or folder named “Extron Electronics”.
Using the software
1.
To run the Button-Label Generator program, double-click on the
Button-Label Generator icon (shown at right) in the Extron
Electronics group or folder, and click OK when prompted. The
Button-Label Generator window appears (figure 5-18).
Figure 5-18 — Extron’s Button-Label Generator window
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
5-23
Matrix Software, cont’d
2.
In the Systems selection, choose the appropriate matrix size.
3.
Using normal Windows controls, you can create and print labels that can be
placed in the label windows on the front panel of the switcher.
4.
Press the Clear All Buttons button to create new labels as many times as
necessary to make all of the button labels that you need.
Access the Help program by clicking on the Help menu. Click on the Help menu
on the main screen, choose Show Help, and click on the Load Demo button to see
an example of a completed Extron’s Button-Label Generator window.
5-24
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Matrix Software
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers
6
Chapter Six
HTML Operation
Download the Startup Page
System Status Page
System Configuration Page
File Management Page
Set and View Ties Page
Special Characters
HTML Operation,
cont’d
HTML
Operation
The switcher can be controlled and operated through its Ethernet port, connected
via a LAN or WAN, using a web browser such as Microsoft’s Internet Explorer.
The browser’s display of the switcher’s status or operation has the appearance of
web pages. This chapter describes the factory-installed HTML pages, which are
always available and cannot be erased or overwritten.
If your Ethernet connection to the matrix switcher is unstable, try turning off
the proxy server in your Web browser. In Microsoft’s Internet Explore, click
Tools > Internet Options > Connections > LAN Settings, uncheck the “Use a
proxy server...” box, and then click Ok.
Download the Startup Page
Access the switcher using HTML pages as follows:
1.
Start the Web browser program.
2.
Click in the browser’s Address field.
3.
Enter the Matrix IP address in the browser’s Address field.
If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the factoryspecified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.
4.
If you want the browser to display a page other than the default page (such as
a custom page that you have uploaded), enter a slash (/) and the file name to
open.
The browser’s Address field should display the address in the following format:
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/{optional_file_name.html}
The following characters are invalid in file names: {space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ]
{ } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
5.
Press the keyboard Enter key. The switcher checks to see if it is password
protected.
If the switcher is not password protected, proceed to step 7.
If the switcher is password protected, the switcher downloads the Enter
Network Password page (figure 6-1).
Figure 6-1 — Enter Network Password page
A User Name entry is not required.
6.
Click in the Password field and type in the appropriate administrator or user
password. Click the OK button.
7.
The switcher checks several possibilities, in the following order, and then
responds accordingly:
a.
6-2
Does the address include a specific file name, such as 10.13.156.10/
file_name.html? If so, the switcher downloads that HTML page.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
b.
Is there a file in the switcher ’s memory that is named “index.html”?
If so, the switcher downloads “index.html” as the default startup page.
c.
If neither of the above conditions is true, the switcher downloads the
factory-installed default startup page, “nortxe_index.html” (figure 6-2),
also known as the System Status page.
System Status Page
The System Status page (figure 6-2) provides an overall view of the status of the
matrix switcher, including the primary and secondary power supply status, the
individual voltages, and the fan status (if applicable). The System Status page is
the default page that the switcher downloads when you connect to the switcher.
Access the System Status page from other pages by clicking the Status tab.
Refresh.
Select DSVP.
Figure 6-2 — System Status page
Components that are operating properly are indicated in green.
Failures are indicated in red.
Components that are not installed are indicated in gray.
The status web page automatically updates itself periodically to reflect the latest
status of the switcher components.
The CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus switchers are not available in custom
configurations. Each model has all available monitored components, such as
power supplies and fans, installed. If you see the gray “not installed”
indication, the “not installed” component probably became disconnected
during shipment or rough handling.
Smaller switchers (16 x 16 matrix sizes and smaller) do not show the power
supply and fan status blocks.
If a component fails or becomes disconnected, the display shows the change in
status the next time it updates.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
6-3
HTML Operation, cont’d
DSVP page (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only)
You can view a snapshot-in-time of the input frequencies of connected inputs on
the Digital Sync Validation Processing (DSVP) page (figure 6-3). Click the DSVP
link to the left of the Status page to download the DSVP page. The DSVP page
automatically updates itself every 30 seconds to show the latest input frequencies
changes or if an input has been disconnected.
Select
System Status.
Refresh.
Figure 6-3 — DSVP page
6-4
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
System Configuration Page
The CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher downloads the System
Configuration page (figure 6-4) when you click the Configuration tab. The screen
consists of fields in which you can view and edit IP administration and system
settings. The Email Settings and Passwords pages can be accessed by clicking the
appropriate link. See appendix A, “Ethernet Connection”, for basic information
about IP addresses and subnetting.
Refresh.
Select Passwords.
Select Email Settings.
Select Firmware Upgrade.
Figure 6-4 — System Configuration page
On password-protected connections, there are two levels of protection:
administrator and user. Administrators have full access to all switching capabilities
and editing functions. Users can create ties, create and recall presets, set RGB and
audio mutes, and view all settings with the exception of passwords.
•
Ethernet connection to the switcher, either entering SIS commands (see
chapter 4, “Programmer’s Guide”) or using the Extron Matrix Switcher+
Control Program (see chapter 5, “Matrix Software”) is password protected.
•
Connection via the RS-232/RS-422 port is not password protected.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
6-5
HTML Operation, cont’d
IP Settings fields
The IP Settings fields provide a location for viewing and editing settings unique to
the Ethernet interface. After editing any of the settings on this page, click the
Submit button at the bottom of the page.
Unit Name field
The Unit Name field contains the name used as the “from” information when the
switcher e-mails notification of its failed or repaired status. This name field can be
changed to any valid name, up to 24 alphanumeric characters.
The following characters are invalid in the matrix name: + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] {
} < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
DHCP radio buttons
The DHCP On radio button directs the switcher to ignore any entered IP addresses
and to obtain its IP address from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
server (if the network is DHCP capable). The DHCP Off radio button turns DHCP
off. Contact the local system administrator.
IP Address field
The IP Address field contains the IP address of the connected switcher. This value
is encoded in the switcher’s flash memory.
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields separated by
dots (periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes,
up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.
The factory-installed default address is 192.168.254.254, but if this conflicts with
other equipment at your installation, you can change the IP address to any valid
value.
IP address changes can cause conflicts with other equipment. Only local
system administrators should change IP addresses.
Gateway IP Address field
The Gateway IP Address field identifies the address of the gateway to the mail
server to be used if the switcher and the mail server are not on the same subnet.
The gateway IP address has the same validity rules as the system IP address.
Subnet Mask field
The Subnet Mask field is used to determine whether the switcher is on the same
subnet as the mail server when you are subnetting. For more information, see
“Subnetting — A Primer”, in Appendix A, “Ethernet Connection”.
MAC Address field
The Media Access Control (MAC) Address is hardcoded in the switcher and cannot
be changed.
6-6
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
Date/Time Settings fields
The Date/Time Settings fields (figure 6-5) provide a location for viewing and
setting the time functions.
Figure 6-5 — Date/Time Settings fields
Change the date and time settings as follows:
1.
Click the desired variable’s drop box. The adjustable variables are month,
day, year, hours, minutes, AM/PM, and (time) zone. A drop down scroll box
appears (the year drop box is selected in figure 6-5).
2.
Click and drag the slider or click the scroll up
button until the desired variable is visible.
3.
Click the desired variable.
button or scroll down
If setting the time, set the local time. The Zone variable allows you to then
enter the offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
The Zone field identifies the standard time zone selected and displays the
amount of time, in hours and minutes, that the local time varies from the GMT
international time reference.
4.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 for other variables that need to be changed.
5.
If appropriate, click in the Daylight Savings radio button to turn on the
daylight savings time feature.
When daylight savings time is turned on, the switcher automatically updates
its internal clock between Standard Time and Daylight Savings Time in the
spring and fall on the date that the time change occurs in the country or region
selected. When Daylight Savings Time is turned off, the switcher does not
adjust its time reference.
6.
Click the Submit button.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
6-7
HTML Operation, cont’d
Passwords page
Access the Passwords page (figure 6-6) by clicking the Passwords link on the
System Settings page.
Select System Settings.
Select Email Settings.
Select Firmware Upgrade.
Figure 6-6 — Passwords page
The fields on the Passwords page are for entering and verifying administrator and
user passwords. Passwords are case sensitive and are limited to 12 uppercase and
lowercase alphanumeric characters. Each password must be entered twice; once in
the Password field and then again in the Re-enter Password field. Characters in
these fields are masked by asterisks (*****). If you do not want to password protect
an access level, leave the Password field and the Re-Enter password field blank.
After entering the desired password in both fields, click the Submit button.
An administrator password must be created before a user password can be
created.
To clear an existing password so that no password is required, erase the existing
password and enter a space in the Password and Re-enter Password fields and click
the Submit button.
6-8
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
Email Settings page
Reach the Email Settings page (figure 6-7) by clicking the Email Settings link on the
System Configuration page. The Email Settings page has fields for setting up the
switcher’s e-mail notification capabilities. For the e-mail settings and for each row
of the e-mail notification settings, click the Edit button to make the fields available
for editing. The button changes to Save. After editing the settings associated with
the Edit/Save button, click the Save button.
Select System Configuration.
Refresh.
Select Firmware Upgrade.
Figure 6-7 — Email Settings page
Mail IP Address field
The Mail IP Address field displays the IP address and the domain name of the mail
server that handles the e-mail for the facility in which the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher is installed.
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields separated by
dots (periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes,
up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.
Domain Name field
The Domain Name field displays the domain name that the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher uses to log on to the e-mail server. Standard domain name
conventions (for example: nnnnn@xxx.com) apply.
The following characters are invalid in a domain name: {space} + ~ , = ‘ [ ]
{ } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?. The @ character is only acceptable as the lead-in
to the domain name (such as @folklore.net).
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
6-9
HTML Operation, cont’d
Email address fields
The eight Email address fields identify the e-mail addresses of the personnel to
whom the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher e-mails notification of its
failure and repair status. Standard e-mail address conventions (nnnnn@xxx.com)
apply.
The check boxes and drop boxes associated with each address field permit the
operator to specify specific criteria under which the switcher will e-mail recipients.
In the associated Missing Input drop boxes, select the inputs to monitor for
presence or absence of a signal. Check the Fans and Power boxes to monitor the
cooling and power supplies. In the associated E-Mail Options drop box, select
whether the recipient is to be e-mailed of failures, fixes, both, not notified, or to be
removed from the e-mail list. The Suspend option is useful for temporarily
removing personnel from the e-mail list when they are unavailable, such as on
travel or vacation. Deleting an e-mail addressee and clicking the submit button
removes the recipient from e-mail notification completely.
Firmware Upgrade page
The Firmware Upgrade page provides a way to replace the firmware that is coded
on the switcher’s control board without taking the switcher out of service, opening
the switcher enclosure, and replacing the firmware chip. Access the Firmware
Upgrade page (figure 6-8) by clicking the Firmware Upgrade link on the System
Configuration page.
Select System Configuration.
Select Email Settings.
Refresh.
Figure 6-8 — Firmware Upgrade page
Update the switcher firmware as follows:
The Firmware Upgrade page is only for replacing the firmware that controls
all switcher operation. To insert your own HTML pages, see “File
Management Page”, on page 6-11.
1.
6-10
Visit the Extron web site, www.extron.com, select the CrossPoint/MAV Plus
product category, and select the latest firmware file for download. Note the
folder to which you save the firmware file.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
2.
Connect the PC to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher via the
switcher’s Ethernet port.
3.
Access the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher using HTML pages.
4.
Click the Configuration tab.
5.
Click the Firmware Upgrade link.
6.
Click the Browse button. An open file window appears.
7.
Navigate to the folder where you saved the firmware upgrade file. Select the
file.
Valid firmware files must have the file extension ‘.S19’. Any other file
extension is not a firmware upgrade.
The original factory-installed firmware is permanently available on the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher. If the attempted firmware upload
fails for any reason, the switcher automatically reverts to the factory-installed
firmware.
8.
Click the Open button.
9.
Click the Upload button. The firmware upload to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher may take a few minutes.
File Management Page
To delete files such as HTML pages from the switcher or to upload your own files
to the switcher, click the File Management tab. The switcher downloads the file
management HTML page (figure 6-9).
Refresh.
Figure 6-9 — File Management page
The files listed in figure 6-9 are shown for example only and may not be
present on your switcher.
To delete a file, check the associated delete check box and click the Delete Files
button.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
6-11
HTML Operation, cont’d
Upload your own files as follows:
The following characters are invalid in file names: {space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] {
} < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
1.
Click the Browse button.
2.
Browse through your system and select the desired file(s).
If you want one of the pages that you create and upload to be the default
startup page, name that file “index.html”.
3.
Click the Upload File button. The file(s) that you selected appear in the list.
Set and View Ties Page
You can create ties on the Set and View Ties page (figure 6-10). Access the Set and
View Ties page by clicking the Control tab.
Refresh.
Select RGB & Audio Settings.
Select Global Presets.
Figure 6-10 — Set and View Ties page
The page consists of a matrix of input (rows) and output (columns) selection
buttons of four different colors:
• The amber buttons indicate video and audio ties.
• The green buttons indicate video only ties.
• The red buttons indicate audio only ties.
• The gray buttons indicate no ties.
If you lose track of the input and output associated with a specific button, let
the mouse pointer rest over a button for a moment. As shown on figure 6-10, a
field pops up that identifies the input and output for that button.
6-12
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
Create or delete a tie
Make or break a tie as follows:
1.
Click the Video Only, Audio Only, or Video & Audio button to select video,
audio, or both for switching (audio follow or audio breakaway). Each mouse
click on a button toggles the other two buttons off.
2.
Move the mouse over the matrix of input and output selection buttons. Click
a button to:
•
Create a preliminary tie (if not tied) of the input and output associated
with that button.
•
Create a preliminary untie (if tied) of the input and output associated
with that button.
A “P” (for preliminary) appears in the button.
If you lose track of the input and output associated with a specific button, let
the mouse rest over one of the tie buttons for a moment. A field pops up (as
shown on figure 6-10) that identifies the input and output for that button.
To tie an input to all outputs, click that input’s input number.
3.
Click the Take button to make the configuration changes or Cancel button to
abandon the configuration changes.
RGB and Audio Settings page
The RGB and Audio Settings page provides a way to set the input audio gain and
attenuation, set the output volume, mute and unmute all video and audio outputs,
and (for CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only) set the RGB delay (switching interval).
Access the RGB and Audio Settings page (figure 6-11) by clicking the RGB & Audio
Settings link on the Control page.
Select Set & View Ties.
Refresh.
Select Global Presets.
Figure 6-11 — RGB and Audio Settings page
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
6-13
HTML Operation, cont’d
Change the input gain and attenuation (audio models only)
Users can set each input’s level of audio gain or attenuation (-18 dB to +24 dB) from
the RGB and Audio Settings page. Audio levels can be adjusted so there are no
noticeable volume differences between sources.
Change an input’s audio level setting as follows:
1.
Click the Input drop box. A drop down scroll box appears (figure 6-12).
Figure 6-12 — Input selection drop box
2.
Click and drag the slider or click on the scroll up
button until the desired input is visible.
3.
Click the desired input.
4.
Click the Input Audio Level (dB) drop box. A drop down scroll box appears
(figure 6-13).
button or scroll down
Figure 6-13 — Gain drop box
6-14
5.
Click and drag the slider or click on the scroll up
button until the desired input is visible.
6.
Click the desired gain or attenuation value.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
button or scroll down
Mute and unmute one or all outputs
Mute one or all outputs as follows:
1.
To select an individual output to mute or unmute, click the Output drop box.
A drop down scroll box appears (figure 6-14).
Figure 6-14 — Output selection drop box
2.
Click and drag the slider or click the scroll up
button until the desired output is visible.
3.
Click the desired output.
4.
Click the Video, Audio, or Follow button to select video, audio, or both for
muting. Each mouse click on a button toggles the other two buttons off.
5.
Click the Mute or UnMute button to mute or unmute the selected output.
button or scroll down
Click the Mute All or UnMute All to mute or unmute all of the outputs.
Observe the Mute status indications on the page (figure 6-15). Unmuted is
displayed in green and muted is displayed in red.
Figure 6-15 — Mute status indications
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
6-15
HTML Operation, cont’d
Change the RGB delay (CrossPoint 450 Plus switchers only)
The RGB delay interval defines how long the screen is blanked when switching to a
new input for the selected output.
Change the RGB delay as follows:
1.
Click the Output drop box. A drop down scroll box appears (figure 6-16).
Figure 6-16 — Output selection drop box
2.
Click and drag the slider or click on the scroll up
button until the desired output is visible.
3.
Click the desired output.
4.
Click the RGB delay drop box. A drop down scroll box appears (figure 6-17).
Figure 6-17 — RGB delay drop box
5.
6-16
Click the desired RGB delay.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
button or scroll down
Change the output volume level (audio models only)
Users can set each output’s volume level through a range of zero steps of
attenuation (full attenuation, minimum volume) to 64 steps of attenuation (no
attenuation, full volume) from the RGB and Audio Settings page.
Change an output’s audio level setting as follows:
1.
Click the output drop box. A drop down scroll box appears (figure 6-18).
Figure 6-18 — Output selection drop box
2.
Click and drag the slider or click the scroll up
button until the desired output is visible.
3.
Click the desired output.
4.
Click the Volume Steps (64 Max) drop box. A drop down scroll box appears
(figure 6-19).
button or scroll down
Figure 6-19 — Volume drop box
5.
Click the desired output volume step value.
The table on the next page defines the value of each audio volume step.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
6-17
HTML Operation, cont’d
Audio volume adjustment settings
dB of
Number
of steps attenuation
6-18
Output
volume
Number
of steps
dB of
attenuation
Output
volume
Number
of steps
dB of
attenuation
Output
volume
00
76
0%
01
63
5.5%
23
41
38.5%
45
19
71.5%
02
62
7%
24
40
40%
46
18
73%
03
61
8.5%
25
39
41.5%
47
17
74.5%
04
60
10%
26
38
43%
48
16
76%
05
59
11.5%
27
37
44.5%
49
15
77.5%
06
58
13%
28
36
46%
50
14
79%
07
57
14.5%
29
35
47.5%
51
13
80.5%
08
56
16%
30
34
49%
52
12
82%
09
55
17.5%
31
33
50.5%
53
11
83.5%
10
54
19%
32
32
52%
54
10
85%
11
53
20.5%
33
31
53.5%
55
9
86.5%
12
52
22%
34
30
55%
56
8
88%
13
51
23.5%
35
29
56.5%
57
7
89.5%
14
50
25%
36
28
58%
58
6
91%
15
49
26.5%
37
27
59.5%
59
5
92.5%
16
48
28%
38
26
61%
60
4
94%
17
47
29.5%
39
25
62.5%
61
3
95.5%
18
46
31%
40
24
64%
62
2
97%
19
45
32.5%
41
23
65.5%
63
1
98.5%
20
44
34%
42
22
67%
64
0
100%
21
43
35.5%
43
21
68.5%
22
42
37%
44
20
70%
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
Global Presets page
You can save and recall global presets from the Global presets page (figure 6-20).
Access the Global presets page by clicking the Global Presets link on the left of the
Control page.
Select Set & View Ties.
Select RGB & Audio Settings.
Refresh.
Figure 6-20 — Global Presets page
Save a preset
Save the current configuration (configuration 0) as a preset as follows:
1.
Click the Save Preset button.
2.
Select the desired preset by clicking on one of the presets listed. To create a
new preset, click one of the [unassigned] buttons. Overwrite an existing preset
by clicking an already existing preset.
3.
If desired, type over the current name in the box adjacent to the Save Preset
button.
Preset names are limited to 12 uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric
characters and the {space} _ and / characters.
The following characters are invalid in preset names:
+ ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ ; : | \ and ?.
If you do not rename an unassigned button, the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher automatically names the preset as Preset {next available
number}.
If you do not rename an existing preset when it is overwritten, the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher retains the same name.
4.
Click the Accept button.
Recall a preset
To recall a global preset to be the current configuration, click the button associated
with the desired preset.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
6-19
HTML Operation, cont’d
Special Characters
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The switcher
will not accept these characters as part of preset names, the switcher’s name,
passwords, or locally created file names.
The switcher rejects the following characters:
{space} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ semicolon (;) colon (:) | \ and ?.
6-20
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • HTML Operation
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers
A
Appendix A
Ethernet Connection
Ethernet Link
Subnetting — A Primer
Ethernet Connection, cont’d
LINK ACT
The rear panel Ethernet connector on the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher can be
connected to an Ethernet LAN or WAN. This connection
makes SIS control of the switcher possible using a computer
connected to the same LAN.
ETHERNET
Ethernet Link
Ethernet connection
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover
cable and must be properly terminated for your application (figure A-1).
•
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher.
•
Patch (straight) cable — Connection of the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus
switcher to an Ethernet LAN.
Patch (straight) cable
Side 1
Wire color
Pin
Side
RJ-45
connector
Insert
Twisted
Pair Wires
1
White-orange
Pin
Side 2
Wire color
1
White-orange
Orange
2
Orange
2
3
White-green
3
White-green
4
Blue
4
Blue
5
White-blue
5
White-blue
6
Green
6
Green
7
White-brown
7
White-brown
8
Brown
8
Brown
Crossover cable
Side 1
Wire color
Pin
Pin
Side 2
Wire color
1
White-orange
1
White-green
2
Orange
2
Green
3
White-green
3
White-orange
4
Blue
4
Blue
5
White-blue
5
White-blue
Orange
6
Green
6
7
White-brown
7
White-brown
8
Brown
8
Brown
Figure A-1 — RJ-45 connector pinout tables
Default address
To access the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher via the Ethernet port, you
will need the switcher’s IP address. If the address has been changed to an address
comprised of words and characters, the actual numeric IP address can be
determined using the Ping utility. If the address has not been changed, the factoryspecified default is 192.168.254.254.
Ping can also be used to test the Ethernet link to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher.
A-2
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection
Ping to determine Extron IP address
The Microsoft Ping utility is available at the DOS prompt. Ping tests the Ethernet
interface between the computer and the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher.
Ping can also be used to determine the actual numeric IP address from an alias and
to determine the web address.
Ping the switcher as follows:
1.
On the Windows task bar, click on Start > Run.
2.
At the Open prompt, type command.
3.
Click on the OK button.
4.
At the DOS prompt, type ping {IP address} and then press [Enter]. The
computer returns a display similar to figure A-2.
The line Pinging ... reports the actual numeric IP address, regardless of
whether you entered the actual numeric IP address or an alias name.
C:\>ping 192.168.254.254
Pinging 192.168.254.254 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply
Reply
Reply
Reply
from
from
from
from
192.168.254.254:
192.168.254.254:
192.168.254.254:
192.168.254.254:
bytes=32
bytes=32
bytes=32
bytes=32
time<10ms
time<10ms
time<10ms
time<10ms
TTL=128
TTL=128
TTL=128
TTL=128
Ping statistics for 192.168.254.254:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
Figure A-2 — Ping response
Ping to determine Web IP address
The Ping utility has a modifier, -a, that directs the command to return the Web
address rather than the numeric IP address.
At the DOS prompt, type ping -a {IP address} and then press [Enter]. The
computer’s return display is similar to the Ping response shown in figure A-2,
except that when you specify the -a modifier, the line Pinging mail... reports the
web IP address rather than the numeric IP address, regardless of whether you
entered the actual numeric IP address or an alias name.
Connect as a Telnet client
The Microsoft Telnet utility is available from the DOS prompt. Telnet allows you to
input SIS commands to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher from the PC
via the Ethernet link and the LAN.
Access the DOS prompt and start Telnet as follows:
1.
On the Windows task bar, click on Start > Run.
2.
At the Open prompt, type command.
3.
Click on the OK button.
4.
At the DOS prompt, type telnet and then press [Enter]. The computer returns
a display similar to figure A-3.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection
A-3
Ethernet Connection, cont’d
Microsoft (R) windows 2000 (TM) Version 5.0 (Build 2195)
Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client
Telnet Client Build 5.00.99203.1
Escape Character is 'CTRL+]'
Microsoft Telnet>
Figure A-3 — Telnet screen
Telnet tips
It is not the intention of this manual to detail all of the operations and functionality
of Telnet, however some basic level of understanding is necessary for operating the
CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher via Telnet.
Open
Connect to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher using the Open
command. Once you are connected to the switcher, you can enter the SIS
commands the same as you would if you were using the RS-232 link.
Connect to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher as follows:
1.
At the Telnet prompt, type open {IP address} and then press [Enter].
If the switcher is not password protected, no further prompts are displayed
until you break or disconnect the connection to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher.
If the switcher is password protected, Telnet displays the password prompt.
2.
If necessary, at the password prompt, type {password} and then press [Enter].
Connection to the switcher via the Ethernet can be password protected. There
are two levels of password protection: administrator and user. A person
logged on as an administrator has full access to all CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switching capabilities and editing functions. Users can select video
and/or audio for output, select test patterns, set RGB and audio mutes, select
a blue screen, and view all settings with the exception of passwords. By
default, the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher ships with both
passwords set to {carriage return}.
Once you are logged in, the switcher returns either Login Administrator or
Login User. No further prompts are displayed until you break or disconnect
the connection to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher.
Escape character and Esc key
When Telnet is first started, the utility advises that the Escape character is ‘Ctrl+]’.
Many SIS commands include the keyboard Esc key. Consequently, some confusion
may exist between the Escape character and the Escape key.
The Telnet Escape character is a key combination, the Ctrl key and the ] key
pressed simultaneously, that returns you to the Telnet prompt while leaving the
connection to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher intact.
The Escape key is the
A-4
Esc
key on the computer keyboard.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection
Local echo
Once connected to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher, by default, Telnet
does not display your keystrokes on the screen. SIS commands are typed in blindly
and only the SIS responses are displayed on the screen. To command Telnet to
show keystrokes, at the Telnet prompt, type set local_echo and then press [Enter]
before you open the connection to the switcher.
With local echo turned on, keystrokes and the switcher’s responses are displayed
on the same line. For example: 1*1!In1 Out1 All, where 1*1! is the SIS command
and In1 Out1 All is the response.
With local echo turned on, all keystrokes are displayed, even those that should be
masked, such as the password entry. For example, when entering a password with
local echo turned on, you will see a display such as a*d*m*i*n*, where admin is the
keyed in password and ***** is the masked response.
Local echo can be turned off by typing unset local_echo and then pressing [Enter] at
the Telnet prompt. If you are connected to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus
switcher and need to access the Telnet prompt to turn local echo off, type the
Escape character ( Ctrl + ] ).
Set carriage return-line feed
Unless commanded otherwise, Telnet transmits a line feed character only (no
carriage return) to the connected switcher when you press the Enter key. This is the
correct setting for SIS communication with the switcher. The Telnet set crlf
command forces Telnet to transmit carriage return and line feed characters when
Enter is pressed, but if crlf is set, the SIS link with the switcher will not function
properly.
Close
To close the link to the switcher, access the Telnet prompt by typing the Escape
character ( Ctrl + ] ). At the Telnet prompt, type close and then press [Enter].
Help
For Telnet command definitions, at the Telnet prompt, type ? and then press
[Enter].
Quit
Exit the Telnet utility by typing quit and then press [Enter] at the Telnet prompt. If
you are connected to the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher, access the
Telnet prompt by typing the Escape character ( Ctrl + ] ).
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection
A-5
Ethernet Connection, cont’d
Subnetting — A Primer
It is not the purpose of this manual to describe TCP/IP protocol in detail.
However, some understanding of TCP/IP subnetting (a subnet is a subset of a
network — a set of IP devices that have portions of their IP addresses in common)
is necessary in order to understand the interaction of the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher and the mail server gateway. To understand subnetting at the
level required to install and operate the CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher,
you must understand the concepts of a gateway, local and remote devices, IP
addresses and octets, and subnet masks and octets.
Gateways
The CrossPoint 450 Plus or MAV Plus switcher can communicate with the e-mail
server that the switcher uses for e-mail notification directly (if they are on the same
subnet) or the communication can be routed via a gateway (a computer that
provides a link between different subnets).
Local and remote devices
The local and remote devices are defined from the point of view of the function
being described. In this manual, subnetting is an issue when you are using the
controlling PC to set TCP/IP and e-mail values in the CrossPoint 450 Plus or
MAV Plus switcher (see “IP Settings/Options window” in chapter 5, “Matrix
Software” and “Email Settings page” in chapter 6, “HTML Operation”). When you
are setting up the variables for e-mail notification, which may include subnetting,
the matrix switcher is the local device and the e-mail server is the remote device.
IP addresses and octets
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields, properly called
octets, separated by dots (periods) (figure A-4). Each octet can be numbered from
000 through 255. Leading zeroes, up to 3 digits total per octet, are optional. Values
of 256 and above are invalid.
Typical IP Address: 192.168.254.254
Octets
Figure A-4 — IP address and octets
Subnet masks and octets
The subnet mask (figure A-5) is used to determine whether the local and remote
devices are on the same subnet or different subnets. The subnet mask consists of
four numeric octets separated by dots. Each octet can be numbered from
000 through 255. Leading zeroes, up to 3 digits total per octet, are optional. Each
octet typically contains either 255 or 0. The octets determine whether or not the
same octets of two IP addresses will be compared when determining if two devices
are on the same subnet.
255 indicates that this octet will be
compared between two IP addresses.
0 indicates that this octet will not be
compared between two IP addresses.
Typical Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Octets
Figure A-5 — Subnet mask and octets
A-6
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection
Determining whether devices are on the same subnet
To determine the subnet, the local device’s IP address is compared to the remote
device’s IP address (figure A-6). Each address’s octets are compared or not
compared, depending on the value in the related subnet mask octet.
•
If a subnet mask octet contains the value 255, the related octets of the local
device’s address and the remote device’s IP address are unmasked.
Unmasked octets are compared (indicated by ? in figure A-6).
•
If the subnet mask octet contains the value 0, the related octets of the local
device’s and remote device’s IP addresses are masked.
Masked octets are not compared (indicated by X in figure A-6).
If the unmasked octets of the two IP addresses match (indicated by = in figure A-6)
(example 1), the two addresses are on the same subnet.
If the two unmasked fields do not match (indicated by ≠ in figure A-6) (example 2
and example 3), the addresses are not on the same subnet.
Local IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
Remote IP Address:
Match?:
Example 1
192.168.254.254
255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X)
192.168.2.25
=.=.X.X — Match
(Same subnet)
Example 2
192.168.254.254
255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X)
190.190.2.25
≠.≠.X.X — No match
(Different subnet)
Example 3
192.168.254.254
255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X)
192.190.2.25
=.≠.X.X — No match
(Different subnet)
Figure A-6 — Comparing the IP addresses
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection
A-7
Ethernet Connection, cont’d
This page was intentionally left blank.
A-8
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Ethernet Connection
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers
B
Appendix B
Reference Information
CrossPoint 450 Plus Specifications
MAV Plus Specifications
Part Numbers
Button Labels
Reference Information,
cont’d
Reference
Information
CrossPoint 450 Plus Specifications
Video
Routing
84 Series ................................
88 Series ................................
816 Series ..............................
124 Series ..............................
128 Series ..............................
1212 Series ............................
168 Series ..............................
1616 Series ............................
2412 Series ............................
2424 Series ............................
3216 Series ............................
3232 Series ............................
Gain ...............................................
Bandwidth ....................................
8 x 4 matrix
8 x 8 matrix
8 x 16 matrix
12 x 4 matrix
12 x 8 matrix
12 x 12 matrix
16 x 8 matrix
16 x 16 matrix
24 x 12 matrix
24 x 24 matrix
32 x 16 matrix
32 x 32 matrix
Unity
450 MHz (-3 dB), fully loaded
0 - 10 MHz: no more than +0.1 dB to -0.1 dB
0 - 130 MHz: no more than +0.8 dB to -0.8 dB
Crosstalk ....................................... -80 dB @ 1 MHz, -55 dB @ 10 MHz, -45 dB @ 30 MHz, -37 dB @ 100 MHz
Switching speed ........................... 200 ns (max.)
Video input
Number/signal type ................... 8, 12, 16, 24, or 32 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component video,
S-video, composite video
Connectors
84/88/816 Series ................. 8 x 5 BNC female
124/128/1212 Series ........... 12 x 5 BNC female
168/1616 Series ................... 16 x 5 BNC female
2412/2424 Series ................. 24 x 5 BNC female
3216/3232 Series ................. 32 x 5 BNC female
Nominal level ............................... 1 Vp-p for Y of component video and S-video, and for composite video
0.7 Vp-p for RGB and R-Y and B-Y of component video
0.3 Vp-p for C of S-video
Minimum/maximum levels ...... Analog: 0.5 V to 2.0 Vp-p with no offset
Impedance .................................... 75 ohms
Horizontal frequency .................. 15 kHz to 150 kHz
Vertical frequency ....................... 30 Hz to 150 Hz
Return loss .................................... <-30 dB @ 5 MHz
DC offset (max. allowable) ......... 1.5 V
Video output
Number/signal type ................... 4, 8, 12, 16, 24, or 32 RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component
video, S-video, composite video
B-2
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
Connectors
84/124 Series .......................
88/128/168 Series ...............
1212/2412 Series .................
816/1616/3216 Series .........
2424 Series ............................
3232 Series ............................
Nominal level ...............................
Minimum/maximum levels ......
Impedance ....................................
Return loss ....................................
DC offset .......................................
Switching type .............................
4 x 5 BNC female
8 x 5 BNC female
12 x 5 BNC female
16 x 5 BNC female
24 x 5 BNC female
32 x 5 BNC female
1 Vp-p for Y of component video and S-video, and for composite video
0.7 Vp-p for RGB and R-Y and B-Y of component video
0.3 Vp-p for C of S-video
0 V to 2.0 Vp-p (follows input)
75 ohms
-30 dB @ 5 MHz
±5 mV with input at 0 offset
Triple-Action™
Sync
Input type .....................................
Output type ..................................
Input level .....................................
Output level ..................................
Input impedance ..........................
Output impedance ......................
Max input voltage .......................
Max. propagation delay ..............
Max. rise/fall time .......................
Polarity ..........................................
RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs
RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs (follows input)
0.5 V to 5.0 Vp-p, 4.0 Vp-p normal
AGC to TTL: 4.0 V to 5.0 Vp-p, unterminated
Inputs 1 to 4: 75 or 510 ohms, switchable
Inputs 5 to 8, 12, or 16: 510 ohms
75 ohms
5.0 Vp-p
<120 ns
4 ns
Positive or negative (follows input)
Audio — audio models only
Routing
84 Series ................................
88 Series ................................
816 Series ..............................
124 Series ..............................
128 Series ..............................
1212 Series ............................
168 Series ..............................
1616 Series ............................
2412 Series ............................
2424 Series ............................
3216 Series ............................
3232 Series ............................
Gain ...............................................
Frequency response .....................
THD + Noise ................................
S/N ................................................
Crosstalk .......................................
Stereo channel separation ..........
CMRR ............................................
8 x 4 stereo matrix
8 x 8 stereo matrix
8 x 16 stereo matrix
12 x 4 stereo matrix
12 x 8 stereo matrix
12 x 12 stereo matrix
16 x 8 stereo matrix
16 x 16 stereo matrix
24 x 12 stereo matrix
24 x 24 stereo matrix
32 x 16 stereo matrix
32 x 32 stereo matrix
Unbalanced output: -6 dB; balanced output 0 dB
20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.05 dB
0.03% @ 1 kHz at nominal level
>90 dB, balanced, at maximum output (21 dBu), unweighted
<-80 dB @ 1 kHz, fully loaded
>80 dB @ 1 kHz
>75 dB @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
B-3
Reference Information, cont’d
Audio input — audio models only
Number/signal type ...................
Connectors ....................................
Impedance ....................................
Nominal level ...............................
Maximum level ............................
Input gain adjustment .................
8, 12, 16, 24, or 32 stereo, balanced/unbalanced
(8, 12, 16, 24, or 32) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 5 pole
>10k ohm, balanced/unbalanced, DC coupled
0 dBu (775 mV)
+19.5 dBu, (balanced or unbalanced) at 0.01% THD+N
-18 dB to +24 dB (default = 0 dB), adjustable per input by RS-232/422,
Ethernet, or front panel
0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms, 0 dBV = 1 Vrms, 0 dBV
2 dBu
Audio output — audio models only
Number/signal type ...................
Connectors ....................................
Impedance ....................................
Gain error ......................................
Maximum level (Hi-Z) ................
Maximum level (600 ohm) .........
Output volume range .................
4, 8, 12, 16, 24, or 32 stereo, balanced/unbalanced
(4, 8, 12, 16, 24, or 32) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 5 pole
50 ohms unbalanced, 100 ohms balanced
±0.1 dB channel to channel
>+21 dBu, balanced or unbalanced at 0.10% THD+N
>+15 dBm, balanced or unbalanced at 0.10% THD+N
0 to 64 (-75.8 dB to 0 dB) in 1 dB increments from steps 1 to 64, 12 dB
increment from step 0 to 1; default = 64 = 0 dB
Control/remote — switcher
Serial host control port
2412, 2424, 3216, 3232 Series
1 RS-232 or RS-422, rear panel 9-pin female D connector
All other models ................. 1 bidirectional RS-232 or RS-422, rear panel 9-pin female D connector
1 bidirectional RS-232, front panel 2.5 mm mini stereo jack
Baud rate and protocol ............... 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 115200 baud (adjustable); 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,
no parity
Serial control pin configurations
RS-232 ................................... 9-pin female D connector: 2 = TX, 3 = RX, 5 = GND
Mini stereo jack: tip = TX, ring = RX, sleeve = GND
RS-422
88, 816, 1212, 168, 1616 Series
9-pin female D connector: 2 = TX-, 3 = RX-, 5 = GND, 7 = RX+, 8 = Tx+
All other models ...... 9-pin female D connector: 1 = TX+, 2 = TX-, 3 = Rx+, 4 = RX-, 5 = GND
Ethernet control port ................... 1 RJ-45 female connector
Ethernet data rate ........................ 10/100Base-T, half/full duplex with autodetect
Ethernet protocol ......................... ARP, DHCP, ICMP (ping), TCP/IP, Telnet, HTTP
Program control ........................... Extron’s control/configuration program for Windows®
Extron’s Simple Instruction Set (SIS™)
Microsoft® Internet Explorer, Telnet
B-4
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
General
Power (24- and 32-input models)
2 power supplies (1 primary, 1 redundant), 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz,
internal
2412/2424 Series: 150 watts
3216/3232 Series: 180 watts
Power (all other models) ............ 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, internal
84/88/124/128 Series: 30 watts
816/1212/168/1616 Series: 36 watts
Temperature/humidity .............. Storage: -40 to +158 °F (-40 to +70 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing
Operating: +32 to +122 °F (0 to +50 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing
Cooling
84-1616 Series ...................... Convection, unvented
2412-3232 Series .................. Forced air, right to left (as viewed from the front)
Rack mount ................................... Yes
Enclosure type .............................. Metal
Enclosure dimensions (Depth excludes connectors. Width excludes rack ears.)
84/88/124/128 Series .......... 5.25" H x 17.0" W x 9.4" D (3U high, full rack wide)
13.3 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 23.9 cm D
816/1212/168/1616 Series .. 10.5" H x 17.0" W x 9.7" D (6U high, full rack wide)
26.7 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 24.6 cm D
2412/3216 Series ................. 14.0" H x 17.0" W x 12.0" D (8U high, full rack wide)
(35.5 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 30.5 cm D)
2424/3232 Series ................. 17.5" H x 17.0" W x 12.0" D (10U high, full rack wide)
(44.5 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 30.5 cm D)
Product weight
84/88/124/128 Series .......... 14.4 lbs (6.5 kg)
816/1212/168/1616 Series .. 19.4 lbs (8.8 kg)
2412/3216 Series ................. 39.0 lbs (17.7 kg)
2424/3232 Series ................. 42.0 lbs (19.1 kg)
Shipping weight
84/88/124/128 Series .......... 21 lbs (10 kg)
816/1212/168/1616 Series . 26 lbs (12 kg)
2412/3216 Series ................. 56 lbs (26 kg)
2424/3232 Series ................. 60 lbs (28 kg)
DIM weight, international
84/88/124/128 Series ......... 25 lbs (12 kg)
816/1212/168/1616 Series . 34 lbs (15.5 kg)
2412/2424/3216/3232 Series
89 lbs (41 kg)
Vibration ....................................... ISTA 1A in carton (International Safe Transit Association)
Listings .......................................... UL, CUL
Compliances ................................. CE, FCC Class A, VCCI, AS/NZS, ICES
MTBF ............................................. 30,000 hours
Warranty ....................................... 3 years parts and labor
All nominal levels are at ±10%.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
B-5
Reference Information, cont’d
MAV Plus Specifications
Video — video models
Routing
88 Series ................................
816 Series ..............................
128 Series ..............................
1212 Series ............................
168 Series ..............................
1616 Series ............................
2412 Series ............................
2424 Series ............................
3216 Series ............................
3232 Series ............................
Gain ...............................................
Bandwidth ....................................
8 x 8 matrix
8 x 16 matrix
12 x 8 matrix
12 x 12 matrix
16 x 8 matrix
16 x 16 matrix
24 x 12 matrix
24 x 24 matrix
32 x 16 matrix
32 x 32 matrix
Unity
150 MHz (-3 dB), fully loaded
0 - 10 MHz: no more than +0.1 dB to -0.1 dB
0 - 30 MHz: no more than +0.1 dB to -0.5 dB
Phase between I/Os (2412/2424/3216/3232 Series)
<1.28º at 3.58 MHz
Differential phase error .............. 1.0º at 3.58 MHz and 4.43 MHz
Differential gain error ................. 1.0% at 3.58 MHz and 4.43 MHz
Crosstalk ....................................... -50 dB @ 5 MHz
Switching speed ........................... 200 ns (max.)
Video input — video models
Number/signal type
88/816 Series ....................... 8 RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component video, S-video, composite video
128 Series .............................. 12 RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component video, S-video, composite video
168/1616 Series ..................... 16 RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component video, S-video, composite video
1212 Series composite video models
12 composite video
2412/2424 Series composite video models
24 composite video
2412/2424 Series S-video models
24 S-video, composite video
B-6
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
3216/3232 Series composite video models
32 composite video
3216/3232 Series S-video models
32 S-video, composite video
Connectors
88/816 Series ....................... 8 x 3 BNC female for RGB/HDTV/component video, 8 x 2 BNC female for
S-video, 8 BNC female for composite video
128 Series .............................. 12 x 3 BNC female for RGB/HDTV/component video, 12 x 2 BNC female
for S-video, 12 BNC female for composite video
168/1616 Series ..................... 16 x 3 BNC female for RGB/HDTV/component video, 16 x 2 BNC female
for S-video, 16 BNC female for composite video
1212 Series composite video models
12 BNC female
2412/2424 Series composite video models
24 BNC female
2412/2424 Series S-video models
24 x 2 BNC female
3216/3232 Series composite video models
32 BNC female
3216/3232 Series S-video models
32 x 2 BNC female
Nominal level ............................... 1 Vp-p for Y of component video and S-video, and for composite video
0.7 Vp-p for RGB and for R-Y and B-Y of component video
0.3 Vp-p for C of S-video
Minimum/maximum levels ...... Analog: 0.5 V to 2.0 Vp-p with no offset
Impedance .................................... 75 ohms
Return loss .................................... <-30 dB @ 5 MHz
DC offset (max. allowable) ......... 1.5 V
External sync (genlock) ............... 0.3 V to 0.4 Vp-p
Video output — video models
Number/signal type
1212/2412/2424/3216/3232 Series composite video models
12, 16, 24, or 32 composite video
1212/2412/2424/3216/3232 Series S-video models
12, 16, 24, or 32 S-video
All other models ................. 8 or 16 RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component video, S-video, composite video
(follows input type)
Connectors
128/168 Series ..................... 8 x 3 BNC female for RGB/HDTV/component video, 8 x 2 BNC female for
S-video, 8 BNC female for composite video
1212/2412 Series composite video models
12 BNC female for composite video
1212/2412 Series S-video models
12 BNC female for composite video or
24 BNC female for S-video
816/1616/3216 Series .......... 16 x 3 BNC female for RGB/HDTV/component video, or 16 x 2 BNC female
for S-video, or 16 BNC female for composite video
2424 Series ............................ 24 BNC female for composite video or
48 BNC female for S-video
3232 Series ............................ 32 BNC female for composite video or
64 BNC female for S-video
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
B-7
Reference Information, cont’d
Nominal level ............................... 1 Vp-p for Y of component video and S-video, and for composite video
0.7 Vp-p for RGB and for R-Y and B-Y of component video
0.3 Vp-p for C of S-video
Minimum/maximum levels ...... 0.5 V to 2.0 Vp-p (follows input)
Impedance .................................... 75 ohms
Return loss .................................... <-30 dB @ 5 MHz
DC offset ....................................... ±5 mV with input at 0 offset
Switching type ............................. Vertical interval
Sync — MAV Plus 88/128/1212/168/816/1616 video models
Genlock connectors ..................... 1 BNC female
Standards ...................................... NTSC 3.58, NTSC 4.43, PAL, SECAM
Sync — MAV Plus 2412/2424/3216/3232 video models
Standards ...................................... NTSC 3.58, NTSC 4.43, PAL, SECAM
Audio — audio models
Routing
88 Series ................................
816 Series ..............................
128 Series ..............................
164 Series ..............................
168 Series ..............................
1616 Series ............................
2412 Series ............................
2424 Series ............................
3216 Series ............................
3232 Series ............................
Gain
MAV Plus 128 AV RCA .....
All other models .................
Frequency response .....................
THD + Noise ................................
S/N ................................................
Crosstalk .......................................
Stereo channel separation ..........
CMRR ............................................
8 x 8 stereo matrix
8 x 16 stereo matrix
12 x 8 stereo matrix
16 x 4 stereo matrix
16 x 8 stereo matrix
16 x 16 stereo matrix
24 x 12 stereo matrix
24 x 24 stereo matrix
32 x 16 stereo matrix
32 x 32 stereo matrix
Unbalanced output: 0 dB
Unbalanced output: -6 dB; balanced output 0 dB
20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±0.05 dB
0.03% @ 1 kHz at nominal level
>90 dB, balanced, at maximum output (21 dBu), unweighted
<-80 dB @ 1 kHz, fully loaded
>80 dB @ 1 kHz
>75 dB @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz
Audio input — audio models
Number/signal type
MAV Plus 128 AV RCA ..... 12 stereo, unbalanced
All other models ................. 8, 12, 16, 24, or 32 stereo, balanced/unbalanced
Connectors
MAV Plus 128 AV RCA ..... 12 pairs of RCA connectors
All other models ................. (8, 12, 16, 24, or 32) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 5 pole
Impedance .................................... >10k ohm, balanced/unbalanced, DC coupled
Nominal level
MAV Plus 2412/2424/3216/3232 Series
-10 dBV (316 mV)
All other models ................. 0.1 dBu (775 mV)
Maximum level ............................ +19.5 dBu, (balanced or unbalanced) at 1% THD+N
B-8
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
Input gain adjustment ................. -18 dB to +24 dB (default = 0 dB), adjustable per input by RS-232/422 or
front panel or by Ethernet
0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms, 0 dBV = 1 Vrms, 0 dBV
2 dBu
Audio output — audio models
Number/signal type
MAV Plus 128 AV RCA .....
All other models .................
Connectors
MAV Plus 128 AV RCA .....
All other models .................
Impedance ....................................
Gain error ......................................
Maximum level (Hi-Z) ................
Maximum level (600 ohm) .........
Output volume range .................
8 stereo, unbalanced
4, 8, 12, 16, 24, or 32 stereo, balanced/unbalanced
8 pairs of RCA connectors
(4, 8, 12, 16, 24, or 32) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 5 pole
50 ohms unbalanced, 100 ohms balanced
±0.1 dB channel to channel
>+21 dBu, balanced or unbalanced at 0.10% THD+N
>+15 dBm, balanced or unbalanced at 0.10% THD+N
0 to 64 (-75.8 dB to 0 dB) in 1 dB increments from steps 1 to 64, 12 dB
increment from step 0 to 1; default = 64 = 0 dB
Control/remote — switcher
Serial host control port
2412/2424/3216/3232 Series
1 RS-232 or RS-422, rear panel 9-pin female D connector
All other models ................. 1 bidirectional RS-232 or RS-422, rear panel 9-pin female D connector
1 bidirectional RS-232, front panel 2.5 mm mini stereo jack
Baud rate and protocol ............... 9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 115200 baud (adjustable); 8 data bits, 1 stop bit,
no parity
Serial control pin configurations
88/816/164/168/1212/1616 Series
RS-232 ........................ 9-pin female D connector: 2 = TX, 3 = RX, 5 = GND
Mini stereo jack: tip = TX, ring = RX, sleeve = GND
RS-422 ........................ 2 = TX-, 3 = RX-, 5 = GND, 7 = RX+, 8 = Tx+
2412, 2424, 3216, 3232 Series
RS-232 ........................ 9-pin female D connector: 2 = TX, 3 = RX, 5 = GND
RS-422 ........................ 1 = Tx+, 2 = Tx-, 3 = Rx+, 4 = Rx-, 5 = Gnd
Ethernet control port ................... 1 RJ-45 female connector
Ethernet data rate ........................ 10/100Base-T, half/full duplex with autodetect
Ethernet protocol ......................... ARP, DHCP, ICMP (ping), TCP/IP, Telnet, HTTP, SMTP
Program control ........................... Extron’s control/configuration program for Windows®
Extron’s Simple Instruction Set (SIS™)
Microsoft® Internet Explorer, Telnet
General
Power ............................................. 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, internal
88/128 Series ....................... 20 watts
816/1212/164/168/1616 Series
30 watts
2412/3216 Series video models
2 (primary and redundant), 100 watts
2424/3232 Series video models: 2 (primary and redundant), 120 watts
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
B-9
Reference Information, cont’d
Temperature/humidity .............. Storage: -40 to +158 °F (-40 to +70 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing
Operating: +32 to +113 °F (0 to +45 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing
Cooling
MAV Plus 88-1616 .............. Convection, unvented
MAV Plus 2412 3232 ........... Forced air, right to left (viewed from the front panel)
Rack mount ................................... Yes
Enclosure type .............................. Metal
Enclosure dimensions (Depth excludes connectors and controls. Width excludes rack ears.)
88/128 Series (all) and 816/1212/164/168/1616 Composite Video Series and/or Stereo Audio Series
3.5" H x 17.0" W x 9.4" D (2U high, full rack wide)
8.9 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 23.9 cm D
816/1212/168/1616 S-video Series with and without audio
5.25" H x 17.0" W x 9.4" D (3U high, full rack wide)
13.3 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 23.9 cm D
816/168/1616 Component Video Series with and without audio
7.0" H x 17.0" W x 9.7" D (4U high, full rack wide)
17.8 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 24.6 cm D
2412/2424/3216/3232 Composite Video Series and S-video Series
8.75" H x 17.0" W x 12.25" D (5U high, full rack wide)
22.2 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 31.1 cm D
3232 S-Video with Audio Series
14.0" H x 17.0" W x 12.25" D (8U high, full rack wide)
35.6 cm H x 43.2 cm W x 31.1 cm D
Product weight/shipping weight
88/128 Composite Video Series with and without audio (2U enclosures)
8.9 lbs (4.0 kg)/15 lbs (7 kg)
816/1212/164/168/1616 Composite Video Series and Stereo Audio Series (2U enclosures)
9.4 lbs (4.3 kg)/15 lbs (7 kg)
816/1212/168/1616 S-video Series with and without audio (3U enclosures)
11.9 lbs (5.4 kg)/18 lbs (9 kg)
816/168/1616 Component Video Series with and without audio (4U enclosures)
14.4 lbs (6.5 kg)/22 lbs (10 kg)
2412 Series ............................ 18.4 lbs (8.3 kg)/28 lbs (13 kg)
3216 Series ............................ 18.9 lbs (8.6 kg)/28 lbs (13 kg)
2424 Series ............................ 19.1 lbs (8.7 kg)/29 lbs (14 kg)
3232 Series ............................ 19.8 lbs (9.0 kg)/29 lbs (14 kg)
DIM weight (2U, 3U, and 4U models)
International ........................ 25 lbs (12 kg)
Vibration ....................................... ISTA 1A in carton (International Safe Transit Association)
Listings .......................................... UL, CUL
Compliances ................................. CE, FCC Class A, VCCI, AS/NZS, ICES
MTBF ............................................. 30,000 hours
Warranty ....................................... 3 years parts and labor
All nominal levels are at ±10%.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
B-10
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
Part Numbers
CrossPoint 450 Plus part numbers
Model
CrossPoint 450 Plus 84 HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 84 HVA
Part #
60-337-12
60-337-11
CrossPoint 450 Plus 88 HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 88 HVA
60-336-12
60-336-11
CrossPoint 450 Plus 124 HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 124 HVA
60-335-12
60-335-11
CrossPoint 450 Plus 128 HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 128 HVA
60-334-12
60-334-11
CrossPoint 450 Plus 816 HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 816 HVA
60-395-12
60-395-11
CrossPoint 450 Plus 168 HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 168 HVA
60-333-12
60-333-11
CrossPoint 450 Plus 1212 HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 1212 HVA
60-852-12
60-852-11
CrossPoint 450 Plus 1616 HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 1616 HVA
60-332-12
60-332-11
CrossPoint 450 Plus 2412HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 2412HVA
60-470-02
60-470-01
CrossPoint 450 Plus 2424HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 2424HVA
60-468-02
60-468-01
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3216HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3216HVA
60-471-02
60-471-01
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3232HV
CrossPoint 450 Plus 3232HVA
60-469-02
60-469-01
MAV Plus part numbers
Model
MAV Plus 84 HD component/HDTV video
MAV Plus 84 HDA component/HDTV video and audio
MAV Plus 84 SV S-video
MAV Plus 84 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 84 V composite video
MAV Plus 84 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 84 A audio
Part #
60-658DZ
60-658DY
60-685CZ
60-658CY
60-658BZ
60-658BY
60-658AY
MAV Plus 88 HD component/HDTV video
MAV Plus 88 HDA component/HDTV video and audio
MAV Plus 88 SV S-video
MAV Plus 88 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 88 V composite video
MAV Plus 88 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 88 A audio
60-658GZ
60-658GX
60-658FZ
60-658FX
60-658EZ
60-658EX
60-658AX
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
B-11
Reference Information, cont’d
B-12
Model (continued)
MAV Plus 124 HD component/HDTV video
MAV Plus 124 HDA component/HDTV video and audio
MAV Plus 124 SV S-video
MAV Plus 124 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 124 V composite video
MAV Plus 124 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 124 A audio
Part #
60-658JZ
60-658JW
60-658IZ
60-658IW
60-658HZ
60-658HW
60-658AW
MAV Plus 128 HD component/HDTV video
MAV Plus 128 HDA component/HDTV video and audio
MAV Plus 128 SV S-video
MAV Plus 128 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 128 V composite video
MAV Plus 128 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 128 A audio
MAV Plus 128 AV RCA
60-658MZ
60-658MV
60-658LZ
60-658LV
60-658KZ
60-658KV
60-658AV
60-238-14
MAV Plus 816 HD component/HDTV video
MAV Plus 816 HDA component/HDTV video and audio
MAV Plus 816 SV S-video
MAV Plus 816 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 816 V composite video
MAV Plus 816 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 816 A audio
60-661-12
60-661-11
60-660-12
60-660-11
60-659-12
60-659-11
60-662-13
MAV Plus 164 A audio
60-854-13
MAV Plus 168 HD component/HDTV video
MAV Plus 168 HDA component/HDTV video and audio
MAV Plus 168 SV S-video
MAV Plus 168 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 168 V composite video
MAV Plus 168 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 168 A audio
60-366-12
60-366-11
60-364-12
60-364-11
60-329-12
60-329-11
60-329-13
MAV Plus 1212 SV S-video
MAV Plus 1212 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 1212 V composite video
MAV Plus 1212 AV composite video and audio
60-853-22
60-853-21
60-853-12
60-853-11
MAV Plus 1616 HD component/HDTV video
MAV Plus 1616 HDA component/HDTV video and audio
MAV Plus 1616 SV S-video
MAV Plus 1616 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 1616 V composite video
MAV Plus 1616 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 1616 A audio
60-367-12
60-367-11
60-365-12
60-365-11
60-240-12
60-240-11
60-240-13
MAV Plus 2412 SV S-video
MAV Plus 2412 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 2412 V composite video
MAV Plus 2412 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 2412 A audio
60-474-22
60-474-21
60-474-02
60-474-01
60-474-03
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
Model (continued)
MAV Plus 2424 SV S-video
MAV Plus 2424 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 2424 V composite video
MAV Plus 2424 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 2424 A audio
Part #
60-472-22
60-472-21
60-472-02
60-472-01
60-472-03
MAV Plus 3216 SV S-video
MAV Plus 3216 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 3216 V composite video
MAV Plus 3216 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 3216 A audio
60-475-22
60-475-21
60-475-02
60-475-01
60-475-03
MAV Plus 3232 SV S-video
MAV Plus 3232 SVA S-video and audio
MAV Plus 3232 V composite video
MAV Plus 3232 AV composite video and audio
MAV Plus 3232 A audio
60-473-22
60-473-21
60-473-02
60-473-01
60-473-03
Included parts
Part
Captive screw audio connectors (audio models only)
Extron Software Products CD
CrossPoint 450 Plus/MAV Plus Matrix Switchers User’s Manual
Part #
Replacement parts
Replacement parts
Button and cap diffuser kit
Button overlays
Captive screw audio connectors (qty. 10)
Part #
70-352-01
100-196-01
100-457-01
Optional accessories
Accessory
MKP 3000
Black
White
RAL 9010 white
MAAP, black
MAAP, white
MAAP, RAL 9010 white
MKP 10 MAAP
Black
White
RAL 9010 white
MKP 2000
Black
White
RAL 9010 white
MKP 1000
Gray
Black
White
MCP 1000M (master)
MCP 1000S (slave)
Captive screw audio connectors
RCA-to-BNC adapter
SVHS - BNC adapter
Part #
60-708-02
60-708-03
60-708-05
60-709-02
60-709-03
60-709-05
60-710-10
60-710-20
60-710-50
60-682-02
60-682-03
60-682-05
60-239-01
60-239-02
60-239-03
60-298-01
60-298-02
10-703-12
10-264-01
26-353-01
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
B-13
Reference Information, cont’d
Cables
When using signals with a scanning frequency of 15-125 kHz and running distances
of 100 feet or more, use high resolution BNC cables to achieve maximum
performance.
Bulk cable
RG6/super high resolution cable
RG6/SHR-1 bulk , 500’
RG6/SHR-1 bulk , 1000’
RG6/SHR-4 bulk , 500’
RG6/SHR-5 bulk , 500’
RG6/SHR male crimp connectors, qty. 50
Part #
22-098-02
22-098-03
22-099-02
22-100-02
100-075-51
RG59/High Resolution Cable
RG59/HR-1 bulk , 500’
RG59/HR-1 bulk , 1000’
RG59/HR-1 plenum, bulk , 500’
RG59/HR-1 plenum, bulk , 1000’
RG59/HR male crimp connectors, qty. 50
Part #
22-145-02
22-145-03
22-146-02
22-146-03
100-075-51
BNC-4 Mini HR Cable
BNC-4 Mini HR bulk, 500’
BNC-4 Mini HR bulk, 1000’
Part #
22-032-02
22-032-03
BNC-5 Mini HR Cable
BNC-5 Mini HR bulk, 500’
BNC-5 Mini HR bulk, 1000’
Part #
22-020-02
22-020-03
Plenum BNC-5 Mini HR Cable
Plenum BNC-5 Mini HR bulk, 500’
Plenum BNC-5 Mini HR bulk, 1000’
Part #
22-103-02
22-103-03
Assorted connectors
BNC connectors
BNC Mini HR crimp connectors, qty. 50
SHRmale crimp connectors, qty. 50
BNC bulkhead connectors, qty. 50
(for custom wall plates)
Part #
100-074-51
100-075-51
100-076-51
Pre-cut cables
BNC-4 Mini HR cable is used for RGBS cable runs, and BNC-5 Mini HR cable is
used for RGBHV cable runs. Either type can also be used for composite video,
S-video, or RGsB. All Extron BNC cables have male connectors on both ends. A
plenum version of the BNC-5 Mini HR cable is also available.
BNC-4 Mini HR Cable
BNC-4-25’ MHR (25 feet/7.5 meters)
BNC-4-50’ MHR (50 feet/15.0 meters)
BNC-4-75’ MHR (75 feet/23.0 meters)
BNC-4-100’ MHR (100 feet/30.0 meters)
BNC-4-150’ MHR (150 feet/45.0 meters)
BNC-4-200’ MHR (200 feet/60.0 meters)
BNC-4-250’ MHR (250 feet/75.0 meters)
BNC-4-300’ MHR (300 feet/90.0 meters)
BNC-5-25’ MHR (25 feet/7.5 meters)
B-14
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
Part #
26-210-04
26-210-05
26-210-06
26-210-07
26-210-08
26-210-09
26-210-54
26-210-53
26-260-03
BNC-5 Mini HR Cable
BNC-5-50’ MHR (50 feet/15.0 meters)
BNC-5-75’ MHR (75 feet/23.0 meters)
BNC-5-100’ MHR (100 feet/30.0 meters)
BNC-5-150’ MHR (150 feet/45.0 meters)
BNC-5-200’ MHR (200 feet/60.0 meters)
BNC-5-250’ MHR (250 feet/75.0 meters)
BNC-5-300’ MHR (300 feet/90.0 meters)
Part #
26-260-04
26-260-16
26-260-05
26-260-12
26-260-06
26-260-18
26-260-14
Bulk cable in lengths up to 5000' (1524 meter) rolls is available with or
without connectors.
Button Labels
Page B-17 provides strips of blank button labels. If desired, copy them or cut them
out, write button information in each button area as desired, and put them in the
switcher’s input or output buttons’ windows. You can also create labels using the
Button-Label Generator software (see chapter 5, “Matrix Software”).
Installing labels in the matrix switcher’s buttons
Install new labels in the matrix switcher’s front panel buttons as follows:
1.
Make new labels using either the blanks on page B-17 or the Button-Label
Generator software. Cut them out.
2.
Remove the button from the switcher by grasping the button firmly and
pulling it away from the front panel (figure B-1).
There are different button models available. Your buttons may appear
different.
Base
TE
XT
Diffuser
Clear Lens
Button Label
Pry the two
pieces apart.
Separating the twopiece button here at
the corner.
Figure B-1 — Illuminated button label replacement
3.
Use a small screwdriver or Extron Tweeker to gently lever the button cap off
of the white backing plate.
4.
Insert a button label into the cap and gently but firmly press the cap onto the
white backing plate.
5.
Press the button into place in the matrix switcher.
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
B-15
Reference Information, cont’d
This page was intentionally left blank.
B-16
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
Button label blanks
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
B-17
Reference Information, cont’d
This page was intentionally left blank.
B-18
CrossPoint 450 Plus and MAV Plus Switchers • Reference Information
Extron’s Warranty
Extron Electronics warrants this product against defects in materials and workmanship for a period
of three years from the date of purchase. In the event of malfunction during the warranty period
attributable directly to faulty workmanship and/or materials, Extron Electronics will, at its option,
repair or replace said products or components, to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore
said product to proper operating condition, provided that it is returned within the warranty period,
with proof of purchase and description of malfunction to:
USA, Canada, South America,
and Central America:
Europe, Africa, and the Middle East:
Extron Electronics
1001 East Ball Road
Anaheim, CA 92805, USA
Extron Electronics, Europe
Beeldschermweg 6C
3821 AH Amersfoort
The Netherlands
Asia:
Japan:
Extron Electronics, Asia
135 Joo Seng Road, #04-01
PM Industrial Bldg.
Singapore 368363
Extron Electronics, Japan
Kyodo Building
16 Ichibancho
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082
Japan
This Limited Warranty does not apply if the fault has been caused by misuse, improper handling care,
electrical or mechanical abuse, abnormal operating conditions or non-Extron authorized modification
to the product.
If it has been determined that the product is defective, please call Extron and ask for an Applications
Engineer at (714) 491-1500 (USA), 31.33.453.4040 (Europe), 65.383.4400 (Asia), or 81.3.3511.7655 (Japan)
to receive an RA# (Return Authorization number). This will begin the repair process as quickly as
possible.
Units must be returned insured, with shipping charges prepaid. If not insured, you assume the risk of
loss or damage during shipment. Returned units must include the serial number and a description of
the problem, as well as the name of the person to contact in case there are any questions.
Extron Electronics makes no further warranties either expressed or implied with respect to the
product and its quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular use. In no event
will Extron Electronics be liable for direct, indirect, or consequential damages resulting from any
defect in this product even if Extron Electronics has been advised of such damage.
Please note that laws vary from state to state and country to country, and that some provisions of this
warranty may not apply to you.
www.extron.com
Extron Electronics, USA
1230 South Lewis Street
Anaheim, CA 92805
800.633.9876 714.491.1500
FAX 714.491.1517
Extron Electronics, Europe
Beeldschermweg 6C
3821 AH Amersfoort, The Netherlands
+800.3987.6673 +31.33.453.4040
FAX +31.33.453.4050
Extron Electronics, Asia
135 Joo Seng Rd. #04-01
PM Industrial Bldg., Singapore 368363
+800.7339.8766 +65.6383.4400
FAX +65.6383.4664
© 2007 Extron Electronics. All rights reserved.
Extron Electronics, Japan
Kyodo Building, 16 Ichibancho
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082
Japan
+81.3.3511.7655 FAX +81.3.3511.765
Download PDF

advertising